Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 456

HyperWorks Desktop

Post-Processing for Finite Element


Analysis

HyperWorks is a division of Altair altairhyperworks.com


Altair Engineering Support Contact Information
Web site www.altairhyperworks.com

Location Telephone e-mail

Australia 64.9.413.7981 anzsupport@altair.com

Brazil 55.11.3884.0414 br_support@altair.com

Canada 416.447.6463 support@altairengineering.ca

China 86.400.619.6186 support@altair.com.cn

France 33.1.4133.0992 francesupport@altair.com

Germany 49.7031.6208.22 hwsupport@altair.de

India 91.80. 6629.4500 support@india.altair.com


1.800.425.0234 (toll free)

Italy 39.800.905.595 support@altairengineering.it

Japan 81.3.5396.2881 support@altairjp.co.jp

Korea 82.70.4050.9200 support@altair.co.kr

Mexico 55.56.58.68.08 mx-support@altair.com

New Zealand 64.9.413.7981 anzsupport@altair.com

North America 248.614.2425 hwsupport@altair.com

Scandinavia 46.46.460.2828 support@altair.se

United Kingdom 01926.468.600 support@uk.altair.com

In addition, the following countries have resellers for Altair Engineering: Colombia, Czech Republic, Ecuador, Israel, Russia,
Netherlands, Turkey, Poland, Singapore, Vietnam, Indonesia
Official offices with resellers: Canada, China, France, Germany, India, Malaysia, Italy, Japan, Korea, Spain, Taiwan, United
Kingdom, USA

Copyright© Altair Engineering Inc. All Rights Reserved for:


HyperMesh® 1990-2014; HyperCrash® 2001-2014; OptiStruct® 1996-2014; RADIOSS®1986-2014; HyperView®1999-2014;
HyperView Player® 2001-2014; HyperStudy® 1999-2014; HyperGraph®1995-2014; MotionView® 1993-2014; MotionSolve® 2002-
2014; HyperForm® 1998-2014; HyperXtrude® 1999-2014; Process Manager™ 2003-2014; Templex™ 1990-2014; TextView™
1996-2014; MediaView™ 1999-2014; TableView™ 2013-2014; BatchMesher™ 2003-2014; HyperMath® 2007-2014;
Manufacturing Solutions™ 2005-2014; HyperWeld® 2009-2014; HyperMold® 2009-2014; solidThinking® 1993-2014; solidThinking
Inspire® 2009-2014; solidThinking Evolve®™ 1993-2014; Durability Director™ 2009-2014; Suspension Director™ 2009-2014;
AcuSolve® 1997-2014; AcuConsole® 2006-2014; SimLab®™2004-2014 and Virtual Wind Tunnel™ 2012-2014.

In addition to HyperWorks® trademarks noted above, Display Manager™, Simulation Manager™, Compute Manager™, PBS™,
PBSWorks™, PBS GridWorks®, PBS Professional®, PBS Analytics™, PBS Desktop™, PBS Portal™, PBS Application Services™,
e-BioChem™, e-Compute™ and e-Render™ are trademarks of ALTAIR ENGINEERING INC.

Altair trademarks are protected under U.S. and international laws and treaties. Copyright© 1994-2014. Additionally, Altair software
is protected under patent #6,859,792 and other patents pending. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.

ALTAIR ENGINEERING INC. Proprietary and Confidential. Contains Trade Secret Information. Not for use or disclosure outside of
ALTAIR and its licensed clients. Information contained inHyperWorks® shall not be decompiled, disassembled, or “unlocked”,
reverse translated, reverse engineered, or publicly displayed or publicly performed in any manner. Usage of the software is only as
explicitly permitted in the end user software license agreement.

Copyright notice does not imply publication


Table of Contents

HyperWorks Desktop Introduction


Post Processing for Finite Element Analysis

Chapter 1 - HyperWorks Desktop Environment .................................................... 9


1 - Elements of the Graphics Interface.................................................................. …10
2 - Page and Window Controls ............................................................................. …15
3 - Session Browser .............................................................................................. …17
4 - HyperWorks Desktop Files .............................................................................. …18
Exercise 1a - Learning to Use the HyperWorks Desktop Interface ....................... …20
Chapter 2 - Animation and View Controls ........................................................... 27
1 - Loading Model Files......................................................................................... …28
2 - Using the Animation Controls .......................................................................... …31
2.1 - Controlling the Animation .............................................................................. …31
2.2 - Selecting a Loadcase ................................................................................... …32
3 - Controlling the Model View .............................................................................. …33
Exercise 2a - Load, Animation and Review a Model ............................................. …35
4 - Browsers and Entity Attributes ......................................................................... …42
4.1 - Browsers ....................................................................................................... …42
4.2 - Display Controls & Browser Modes .............................................................. …43
4.3 - Results Browser Views ................................................................................. …44
4.4 - Results Browser Context-Sensitive Menu ..................................................... …53

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 3


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
5 - Masking Elements ........................................................................................... …54
6 - Creating and Using Sets ................................................................................. …56
6.1 - Visualization Toolbar > Sets......................................................................... …56
Exercise 2b - Applying Entity Attributes, Masking, and Creating Groups ............. …59
7 - User Defined Systems .................................................................................... …70
7.1 - User Defined Coordinate Systems ............................................................... …70
7.2 - HyperView Coordinate Systems................................................................... …72
7.3 - HyperView System Review Dialog ............................................................... …73
8 - Graphical Manipulators ................................................................................... …74
8.1 - Display State of Graphical Manipulators ...................................................... …74
9 - Symmetry ........................................................................................................ …78
Chapter 3 - Strength Analysis ............................................................................... 81
1 - Contour Plots .................................................................................................. …82
1.1 - Contour icon & Contour from the menu bar. ................................................ …82
1.2 - Post-processing Stress Results Using the Contour Panel. ........................ …102
1.3 – Contour using Results Browser ................................................................. …104
2 - Tensor Plots .................................................................................................. …108
2.1 - Tensor icon & Tensor from the menu bar. .................................................. …108
2.2 - Tensor using Results Browser. .................................................................. …114
3 - Querying Results........................................................................................... …116
3.1 – Advanced Query........................................................................................ …119
4 – Annotating Model Results ............................................................................ …124
4.1 – Notes ......................................................................................................... …124
4.2 – Measures .................................................................................................. …131
5 – HyperWorks Results Math ............................................................................ …147
5.1 – Results Math Templates ............................................................................ …148
5.2 – HyperView Expression Builder .................................................................. …149
5.3 – Results Math & HyperView Results Browser ............................................. …153
6 - Derived Load Cases...................................................................................... …154

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 4


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
6.1 - Steps .......................................................................................................... …155
6.2 - Linear-Superposition ................................................................................... …156
6.3 - Envelope ..................................................................................................... …157
6.4 - Derived Load Cases & HyperView Results Browser ................................... …159
Exercise 3a - Post Processing a Strength Analysis ............................................ …160
Exercise 3b - Using Result Math for a Strength Analysis .................................... …171
7 – Free Body Diagrams (FBD) .......................................................................... …179
7.1 – FBD Overview ............................................................................................ …179
7.2 – FBD Utility .................................................................................................. …179
7.3 – FBD Solver Interfacing ............................................................................... …187
Chapter 4 - Plotting Basics ................................................................................. 189
1 - HyperGraph 2D Introduction .......................................................................... …189
2 - HyperGraph 2D - GUI .................................................................................... …192
2.1 - HyperGraph 2D - Browsers......................................................................... …193
2.2 - HyperGraph 2D - Toolbars.......................................................................... …200
3 - Plotting XY Data ............................................................................................ …204
4 - Evaluating Curve Data and Curve Referencing ............................................. …209
4.1 – Creating and Defining Curves .................................................................... …209
5 - Changing Curve Display Attributes ................................................................ …213
5.1 - Curves Attributes ........................................................................................ …214
5.2 - Legends ...................................................................................................... …217
5.3 - Notes .......................................................................................................... …218
5.4 - Axes ............................................................................................................ …221
5.5 - Headers and Footers .................................................................................. …223
5.6 - Datum Lines................................................................................................ …224
5.7 - Coordinate Info ........................................................................................... …226
5.8 - Options: Setting Default Parameters for XY Plots ....................................... …227
5.9 - Style Sheets................................................................................................ …230
6 - Curve Filtering ............................................................................................... …231

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 5


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Exercise 4a - Creating and Editing XY Plots from Data Files ............................. …233
Exercise 4b - Multiple File Plotting to plot multiples curves in one plot .............. …239
Exercise 4c - Perform Math on Curves Using the Plot Browser ......................... …244
Exercise 4d - Modifying Plots with the Plot Browser .......................................... …252
Exercise 4e - Using Unit Scaling and Plot Browser ............................................ …262
Chapter 5 - Modal & Frequency Response (NVH) Analysis .............................. 267
1 - Viewing Deformed Shapes ............................................................................ …267
2 - Contour Plots of Complex Results ................................................................ …271
2.1 – Complex Results Introduction.................................................................... …271
2.2 – Complex Results in HyperView ................................................................. …273
3 - Creating Measure of Contour vs. Angle ........................................................ …275
4 - Creating Complex & Polar Plots .................................................................... …277
4.1 - Complex Plots ............................................................................................ …277
4.2 - Polar Plots .................................................................................................. …280
5 - Strain Energy Summation using Result Math ................................................ …283
6 - NVH Post Processing Utilities ....................................................................... …287
6.1 - NVH User Profile ........................................................................................ …287
6.2 - Modal/Panel Participation Utility ................................................................. …289
6.3 - Order Analysis Utility .................................................................................. …301
6.4 - Waterfall Charts ......................................................................................... …306
Exercise 5a - Post Processing of a Forced Frequency Response Analysis ....... …309
Exercise 5b - Calculating the Part Total Strain Energy....................................... …317
Chapter 6 - Crashworthiness .............................................................................. 323
1 - Measures – Distance Between and Position ................................................. …324
2 - Section Cuts .................................................................................................. …328
3 - Vector Plots ................................................................................................... …334
4 – Tracking System........................................................................................... …339
5 - Tracing .......................................................................................................... …344
6 - Exploded Views............................................................................................. …346

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 6


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
7 - Synchronizing Data and Windows ................................................................. …349
8 – Overlaying Images and Videos ..................................................................... …354
9 – Exporting a Deformed Shape ........................................................................ …366
10 - Crash Tools for Plotting ............................................................................... …367
10.1 - Vehicle Safety Tools ................................................................................. …367
10.2 – Bar Charts ................................................................................................ …369
10.3 – Collision Detection ................................................................................... …371
Exercise 6a - Post Processing Crash Analysis Results ...................................... …374
Exercise 6b - Synchronize Animation and Video Overlay ................................... …385
Chapter 7 - Publishing Results and Advanced Topics ..................................... 395
1 - Result Presentation ....................................................................................... …396
1.1 - Capturing Images/Videos............................................................................ …396
1.2 - Publish to HTML or PowerPoint .................................................................. …397
2 - Report Templates .......................................................................................... …403
2.1 - Template and Flexible Reports ................................................................... …404
2.2 - Report Templates Toolbar .......................................................................... …405
2.3 - Parameter Browser ..................................................................................... …407
3 – HyperWorks Tools ........................................................................................ …409
3.1 - HyperView Player ....................................................................................... …409
3.2 - HvTrans ...................................................................................................... …413
3.3 - HgTrans ...................................................................................................... …415
Exercise 7a - Result Presentation and HyperView Player .................................. …416
Exercise 7b - Using HvTrans .............................................................................. …426
Exercise 7c - Creating and Parameterizing Report Templates ........................... …429
Chapter 8 - Improve Designs with HyperStudy: Explore, Study, Optimize ..... 439
1 – HyperStudy Introduction ............................................................................... …439
2 – HyperStudy Benefits ..................................................................................... …440
HyperStudy Tutorial - Working with a Parameterized File ................................... …444

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 7


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Appendix A - HyperWorks Desktop Customization .......................................... 451
DEMO A1 - HyperMesh Desktop Customization .................................................... 451

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 8


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Chapter 1

HyperWorks Desktop Environment


HyperWorks Desktop is an integrated user environment for modeling and visualization. It
can be used for finite element and multi-body dynamics simulations. It combines several
applications in one environment. HyperMesh is available in the Desktop as well as in the
traditional standalone mode.

HyperWorks Desktop belongs to the HyperWorks software suite and consists of the following
applications:
 HyperMesh – Universal finite element pre- and post-processor
 HyperView – High performance finite element and mechanical systems post-processor,
engineering plotter, and data analysis tool
 MotionView – Multi-body dynamics pre- and post-processor
 HyperGraph (2D & 3D) – Engineering plotter and data analysis tool
 MediaView – Video viewer
 TextView – HTML-based text editor
 Table View

The applications interact with each other. For example the view (rotations, pan, zoom) between
HyperMesh and HyperView can be synchronized, or HyperView, MediaView and HyperGraph
time history animations are synchronized.
The open environment allows for customization of the user interface, report and process
automation.
Results obtained from solvers like OptiStruct, RADIOSS, NASTRAN, ABAQUS, LS-DYNA,
ANSYS etc… can be viewed, analyzed and plotted using these applications. The open
architecture of HyperWorks Desktop coupled with its automation capabilities allow for an easy,
quick, and complete understanding of your analysis results. This chapter helps you in getting a
better understanding of the interface, the tools, and the terminologies that you come across
while working with HyperWorks Desktop.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 9
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

This chapter contains:


 Elements of the Graphics Interface
 Page and Window Controls
 Session Browser
 HyperWorks Desktop Files

1 - Elements of the Graphics Interface


The main elements of the HyperWorks Desktop Graphics Interface are shown in the image
below.

Menu bar
Windows style pull-down menus that allow you to access the HyperWorks Desktop functions
and tools are located along the top of the screen. The top-level menu choices vary, based on
the active application in the current window.

Graphics area
Models, plots, animations, and text are displayed in this area. It can be divided into multiple
windows.

10 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Toolbars
Panels containing tools associated with the active application can be accessed using the toolbar
buttons. Panels are also accessible from the menu bar. See Select Application Menu for the
various toolbar types.

Panel
Most operations are performed using the panel options.

Tab Area
The Tab Area is the portion of the graphical user interface that contains the browsers and other
functionality not shown in the panel area. The Tab Area can be moved to either the left or right
side of the graphics area, or both, or it can be hidden completely.

Message bar
The current load case and simulation, as well as model statistics, are displayed along the
bottom of the screen.

Select application menu


This menu allows you to change the active HyperWorks Desktop application in any window.
The options are: HyperMesh, HyperView, HyperGraph, MediaView, TextView, MotionView,
HyperGraph 3D, and FE Model. A description for each application is included below.

Select Application Menu


You can select one of the following applications from the Select application menu. Loading
each application changes the toolbar and menu bar settings. The table below describes the
purpose of each application and shows the changes in their corresponding tool bar.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 11


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

HyperMesh
HyperMesh is a high-performance finite element pre- and post-processor for major finite
element solvers, which allows engineers to analyze design conditions in a highly interactive and
visual environment. HyperMesh’s user-interface is easy to learn and supports the direct use of
CAD geometry and existing finite element models, providing robust interoperability and
efficiency. Advanced automation tools within HyperMesh allow users to optimize meshes from a
set of quality criteria, change existing meshes through morphing, and generate mid-surfaces
from models of varying thickness.

HyperView
HyperView is a complete post-processing and visualization environment for finite element
analysis (FEA), multi-body system simulation, video, and engineering data. Amazingly fast 3-D
graphics and unparalleled functionality set a new standard for the speed and integration of CAE
results post-processing. HyperView enables you to visualize data interactively as well as
capture and standardize your post-processing activities using process automation features.
HyperView also saves 3-D animation results in Altair's compact H3D format so you can visualize
and share CAE results within a 3-D web environment using HyperView Player.

HyperGraph 2D
HyperGraph 2D is a powerful data analysis and plotting tool with interfaces to many popular file
formats. Its sophisticated math engine is capable of processing even the most complex
mathematical expressions. HyperGraph 2D combines these features with high-quality
presentation output and customization capabilities to create a complete data analysis system for
any organization.

12 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

HyperGraph 3D
HyperGraph 3D offers a 3-D plotting environment that is fully integrated with HyperWorks, for
managing, reviewing, and analyzing 3-D plots such as, waterfall, surface, and 3-D line data.

MediaView
MediaView plays and displays video files and static images. Playback of video files is
synchronized with HyperView model animations plus HyperGraph plots for data comparison and
analysis. Video playback can be automatic or manually controlled. During manual playback,
videos can be controlled by clicking on XY curve locations to see the corresponding frame in the
video.

TextView
TextView provides both powerful math script processing plus a text editor. It is an integrated
application in HyperWorks Desktop. TextView’s math scripts can reference vector data from
HyperGraph and HyperGraph 3D windows for automating data processing and data summary.

TableView
TableView creates an Excel-like spreadsheet inside of HyperWorks Desktop. You can use
Templex expressions inside of a cell to synchronize with HyperGraph and create summary
tables that update accordingly using report templates. Value-dependent formatting allows for
the easy detection of critical key point indicators (KPI's). Basic spreadsheet functionality to
format and edit the table cells is also available.

MotionView
MotionView is a general purpose pre- and post-processor and visualization tool for mechanical
system simulation including industry-leading capabilities for assembly management, data
management and flexbody modeling. It provides the ability to create hierarchical models to any
depth through the re-use of system definitions including leveraging its native parametric data
capability. MotionView provides an efficient and easy to use interface including a large number
of modeling utilities to maximize users’ productivity. In addition, through the use of its TCL
automation layer, MotionView enables users to create and re-use scripts and custom user
interfaces. MotionView is integrated in a single environment that also includes state of the art
post-processing, DOE and optimization, and math processing capabilities.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 13


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Online Help
HyperWorks Desktop offers comprehensive documentation in the online help.
The Help can be accessed through the menu bar or the use of the “h” , keyboard (help
documentation is “intelligent”, opening in the section representing the panel that the user is
actively in).
Help also contains detailed tutorials on many advanced functions.

14 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

2 - Page and Window Controls


The Page Controls toolbar is available for all HyperWorks Desktop applications, and is used to
manage pages, change page layouts, and manipulate individual windows:

Next Page Browse forward through the pages.

Previous Page Browse backward through the pages.

Add Page Adds a new page to the session.

Delete Page Adds a new page to the session.

Page Window Displays a pop-up menu containing 20 page layouts


Layout that can be applied to the displayed page.
Expand/Reduce In a multi-window display, use this feature to enlarge
Window or reduce the selected window.
Swap Windows In a multi-window display, use this feature to
rearrange window order.
Synchronize Allows you to select individual windows to be
Windows synchronized for viewing and rotating.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 15


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

In addition to the Page Control toolbar, there is also the Page Edit toolbar. This toolbar is used
to copy and paste various pages and windows.

Cut Page Cuts out the currently selected window.

Copy Window Copies the currently selected window.

Copy Page Copies the currently selected page.

Paste Window Pastes the saved window in the currently selected


window.
Paste Page Pastes the saved page in the currently selected page.

Overlay Overlays the saved window on the currently selected


Window window.
Overlay Page Overlays the saved page on the currently selected
page.

16 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

3 - Session Browser
The Session Browser displays the current session and all of the pages and windows it
contains in a hierarchical view (using the session as the root).

In addition to displaying the current session, the window Layout and Client within the window
can also be changed. There is a check box for Show Page Title to easily control the display of
the page title. There is also a check box for Publish to indicate which pages should be
exported when Publish Session is selected. Finally there are two columns for Save Model
File and Session Data Type.

Clicking the right mouse button on a session, page, or window within the browser’s tree
structure allows you access to a variety of options. The visibility of browser context menu items
is dependent on the current selection - only functions valid for the selected items are activated.
Options selected in an empty space apply to the entire model. For example, Create will create
a new page, Delete will delete the selected page, and Erase will clear the contents in the
selected window. Other options include Rename which renames the selected page, and Make
Current, which allows you to select which page or window will be the current page/window.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 17


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

4 - HyperWorks Desktop Files

Session File (MVW)


A session file is a text file that contains a structured list of statements. The statements include
instructions for page layout and window content, such as graphic and plot information. A
session file is generated whenever you save a work session. Session files can also be created
outside of the program using any text editor or generated from other applications. Session files
have the MVW default extension.
Session files can be opened in HyperView, MotionView, HyperGraph 2D, HyperGraph 3D,
TextView and MediaView.

To save a session to a session file, from the File menu select Save As > Session OR .

To open the file, select File > Open > Session OR .

Application/Model Files
Each application in the HyperWorks Desktop can load and save its own set of files. Application
specific files are accessed in the Applications’ user interfaces provided in the panel area of the
HyperWorks Desktop.

HyperView To open a model, from the File menu select Open > Model OR .

HyperGraph To open a plot, from the File menu select Open > Plot OR .

18 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Preference Files
The preference file is a script file that is read each time a HyperWorks Desktop application is
started. It specifies default user settings such as the window type, printer, page layout, the
autosave interval, and the order in which colors are assigned.
A standard preference file for all HyperWorks Desktop applications exists in the installation
directory and is read every time HyperView is started. On Windows, the file is named
preferences.mvw, while on UNIX, it is named .preferences.mvw. Your own preference
files can be created and registered under the File menu, select Load > Preferences File in the
HyperWorks Desktop. Depending on the setting, your own preferences files either overwrites or
appends settings defined in the standard preference file. For example color settings overwrite
the defaults but registering new readers appends to the supported file list.

Preference Files  File > Load > Preference File


The following Preferences dialox box will be open:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 19


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Exercise 1a - Learning to Use the HyperWorks Desktop Interface


In this exercise, you will:
 Work with session files
 Develop an understanding of the graphics interface
 Use the page and window controls

Step 1: Open the session file …\Model-files\1a-truck\truck.mvw


1. From the menu bar select File > Open > Session.
2. Select the file ...\Model-Files\1a-truck\truck.mvw and click Open.

A HyperWorks Desktop page featuring multiple windows with different applications

Step 2: Add pages and navigate between them using the Page controls.

1. Click the Add Page button, , to add a second page.


Observe the changes to the page counter.

20 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

2. Add one more page.

3. Click the icons, and , to navigate to the next page and previous page,
respectively.
4. Go to page 1.

Step 3: Use the Session Browser to add, rename and navigate between pages.
1. In the Tab Area, click on Session to make the Session Browser active.

2. Right click on Displacement and select Rename.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 21


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

3. Type Page 1 and press ENTER to rename page 1.


4. Add a fourth page by right clicking in the Session Browser and selecting Create.
The new page is displayed as Untitled and becomes the active page in the graphics area.
5. Display the name of page 4 at the top of its page by activating the Show Page Title check
box.

6. Right click on the name Untitled (ID 2) and select Make Current to display page 2.

Step 4: Use Page Layout to create a four window layout.


1. Make sure to be on page 2. Select the downwards arrow next to the Page Layout button

to open the Page Layout options.

2. Click the four window layout .


The border of the upper left window in the four-window layout is cyan to indicate it is the
active window.

22 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Step 5: Change the applications in windows 2-4 on page 2.


1. Make window 2 active.

2. From the Select application menu, select HyperGraph 2D to change the window type for
window 2 from animation to plot.
The toolbar changes to reflect the plot window mode.
3. Activate window 3.
4. Change the window type for window 3 from HyperView to MediaView.
5. Click on window 4 to make it active.
6. Change the window type for window 4 from HyperView to TextView.

7. Go to page 1.

Step 6: Use Swap Windows to change the order of windows on page 1.


1. Activate Page1 > window 2 (plot window).

2. Click the Swap Windows button .


The contents of windows 2 and 1 are exchanged.
When there are only two windows on a page and you click the Swap Windows button, the
windows are automatically swapped.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 23
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Step 7: Expand window 2 to the graphics area.


Use the Expand/Reduce Window button to temporarily expand the HyperView window to fill
the entire graphics area. This allows you to see a larger view of the model without changing the
window layout.
1. Make window 2 (animation) active.

2. Click the Expand/Reduce Window button .

The Expand/Reduce Window button changes to . This button acts as a toggle.

3. Click the button again to return to the original display.

24 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

Step 8: Save the session to a session file.


1. From the File menu, select Save As > Session.
2. Specify a path and the name 1a-practice for the *.mvw file and click Save.

Step 9: Clear the data from the session.

1. From the File menu, select New > Session .


2. Answer Yes to the pop-up message "This operation will discard current session data.
Continue with new session? "

Step 10: Open the session file practice.mvw.


1. Open the session file 1a-practice.mvw.
2. Notice the contents of the session. It contains the number of pages and the window layouts
you created in the previous steps of this exercise.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 25


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 1: HyperWorks Desktop Environment

26 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Chapter 2

Animation and View Controls


This chapter covers the tools within HyperWorks Desktop that control the animation and
manipulate the view of the model. This includes rotating and zooming, as well as masking
elements, turning on/off components, and creating groups.
This chapter covers the following topics:
 Loading Model Files
 Using the Animation Controls
 Controlling the Model View
 Browsers and Entity Attributes
 Masking Entities
 Creating and Using Sets
 User Defined Systems
 Graphical Manipulators
 Symmetry

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 27


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

1 - Loading Model Files


The open architecture of HyperView allows for loading and viewing result files obtained from
several sources. Based on the solver type of the files and the results you would like to visualize
and analyze, there are different ways to load the input deck and their corresponding results into
HyperView. This chapter guides you through the various ways you can load your files and the
various tools available for viewing the model according to your interest.
To access the Load Model panel:

 Click the Open Model button from the Standard toolbar.


Or
 From the menu bar, select File > Open > Model
The Load Model panel allows you to load the result files along with the model files. If the result
file already contains the model definition, it is not a requirement that you load the model file
along with the results. However, when only result files are loaded, the component definitions
such as name and color are not preserved. The solver definition for component names along
with the default color settings is loaded. You can also choose to load only a model or result file.

There are 3 options in this panel: Overlay, Result math template, and Reader Options.
The Result math template allows you to select a template to be loaded into the Derived
Result panel. The options are Standard, Advanced, NVH, Composite or None.
The Reader Options… button opens a window where different options can be specified for the
different results readers:

28 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Activating the Overlay check box in the panel allows you to load multiple models and their
results into a single window. You can then set the active model in the window from the Results
Browser.
This is done by selecting the model from the model list in the Results Browser.

Within the Results Browser, there is a Files View. To turn on the Files View, click the icon

. This adds the Files listing to the top of the Results Browser. The right click
functionality of the Results Browser is also available in the Files listing. This means that you
can also right click on a file and select Make Current to determine the active model.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 29


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Supported Solver Result File Formats


The tables below show some of the solvers results file formats supported by HyperView:
FEA Solver File Format/ File Extension
Natran .op2, .xdb

OptiStruct .op2, .h3d


Abaqus .odb
Ansys .rst, .rth, .rmg
I-DEAS .unv
LS-DYNA .d3plot, .ptf
DLM or LS-DYNA DYNAIN .dynain
MARC .t16
MOLDFLOW .udm
NIKE 3D .n3plot
RADIOSS .A00
HyperMesh .res
Altair Hyper3D .h3d
nSOFT
FEMZIP (DSY, RADIOSS, .fz
d3plot)
CFD (Ensight) .encas, .case

MBD Solver File Format/ File Extension


ADAMS .gra
Altair Flx .flx
DADS .def, .bin
Altair Hyper3D .h3d
MADYMO .kin3, .kn3, .fai
MotionSolve .mrf

In addition to the solver result file formats supported through direct readers, HyperView supports
additional solver formats via result translators.
30 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

2 - Using the Animation Controls


Within HyperWorks Desktop, there are tools to control the animation of the model as well as the
current load case. In this section, the Animation toolbar as well as the Results Browser are
shown.

2.1 - Controlling the Animation


The Animation toolbar is used to animate and control the animation rate of your model. This
toolbar can to displayed by selecting View > Toolbars > HyperWorks > Animation.

The first item in the toolbar allows you to select the animation mode; Transient, Modal, or
Linear:

The next 5 items start/stop the animation or move incrementally through the animation:

There are two slider bars on the Animation toolbar. The top slider bar indicates the current
time step. This slider can be positioned to any time by simply moving the slider to the
appropriate location. The bottom slider controls the animation rate. Moving the slider to the
left slows down the animation rate, while moving the slider to the right speeds up the animation
rate.

The final item in the Animation toolbar is the Animation Controls bottom .

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 31


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Animation Controls panel for transient

This provides additional options not included in the Animation toolbar. Setting the Time
Scales, viewing the Frame Rate, and setting the Increment amount can also be done in this
panel.

2.2 - Selecting a Loadcase


The Results Browser is located in the tab area and allows you to view the HyperView model
structure while providing find, display, and editing control of entities. Many of these options will
be discussed later in this material. The Results Browser also allows you to select the current
Loadcase and the current Time/Angle/Step.

Also within the Results Browser is the Load Case View (shown below). The Load Case View
is a hierarchical listing of all available load cases and simulations. The current load case and
simulation are shown in bold and you can select any load case or simulation by right clicking
and selecting Make Current.

32 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

3 - Controlling the Model View


There are three different toolbars for view controls; the Standard Views toolbar, the 3D View
Control toolbar, and the 2D View Control toolbar. The 2D View Control is available while in
HyperGraph and MediaView, while the Standard Views and the 3D View Controls toolbars are
are available in HyperMesh, HyperView, and HyperGraph3D.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 33


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

34 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Exercise 2a - Load, Animate and Review a Model


This exercise uses the file bumper_0000.rad and the corresponding bumperA001.

Step 1: Load the solver input and result files, bumper_0000.rad and
bumperA001.

1. From the Standard toolbar, select the New Session button, , to delete the
contents of the current HyperWorks Desktop session.
2. Select Open Model to load the Load model panel:

3. Click the Load model file browser, , open the file bumper_0000.rad located in
..\Model-files\2a-bumper\.

4. Click the Load results file browser, , open the file bumperA001 located in
..\Model-files\2a-bumper\.
5. Click Apply to load the model data from the results file along with the input data.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 35


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Step 2: Animate the model.

1. Click the Animate Start/Pause button, , to animate the window.


2. Click the button again to stop the animation.
3. Click on the triangle next to the first button and note the various animation types
available.

Animation Types

A brief description of each animation type is given below:


Transient Displays the model in its time step positions as calculated by the
analysis code.
Modal Creates and displays an animation sequence starting and ending with
the model’s original position. The deforming frames are calculated based
on a sinusoidal function.
Linear Creates and displays an animation sequence starting with the original
position of the model and ending with the fully deformed position. An
appropriate number of frames are linearly interpolated between the first
and last positions.

Step 3: Animate from time 0.00 to 0.03.

4. Click the Animation Controls button, .

5. Click the first arrow next to Current time, , to display the page at time 0.
6. Set the Animate end time to 0.04 by entering 0.03 into the text field.
7. Move the slider bar under Max Frame Rate: down, to slow down the animation.

8. Animate the model.

36 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Note the model animates between 0 and 0.03.


9. Stop the animation.

10. Click the Animate end forward arrow until the slider bar reaches the end of the
animation.

11. Change the animation type to Set Linear Animation Mode and note the difference
in the panel.

Animation Controls panel for Set Linear Animation Mode.

12. Change the animation type back to Set Transient Animation Mode, .

Step 4: Choose a specific time step using the Results Browser.


The active load case and simulation are displayed in the Results Browser:

1. Click on the dropdown for the Loadcase Selector. Notice that there is only one
Loadcase in model.
2. Select Time = 3.0002e-002 under the Loadcase Selector in the Results Browser.
3. Use the arrows to the left of Time = 3.0002e-002 to move through the time steps.

You can also move through loadcases/subcases and modal shapes using the Results
Browser.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 37
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

4. Set the current time to Time = 0.00000.

Step 5: Use the view controls.


The view controls for the animation window are contained in the 3D View Controls toolbar and
the Standard Views toolbar.
1. Within the 3D View Controls toolbar (shown below), left click on the Dynamic Rotate

Mode button, , then left click in the graphics area and drag your mouse to rotate
the model.

If the 3D View Controls toolbar is not visible, select View > Toolbars > HyperWorks >
3D View Controls to turn on its display.

2. Left click on the Pan button, , and then left click and drag your mouse in the
graphics area to pan the model.

3. Left and right click on the arrows, , , to rotate the model, left/right,
up/down, and clockwise/counter clockwise.

4. Left click on the Zoom button, , to zoom in and right click on it to zoom out.

5. Within the Standard Views toolbar (shown below), select the Fit button to fit the
model to the window.
If the Standard Views toolbar is not visible, select View > Toolbars > HyperWorks >
Standard Views to turn on its display.

6. Click the XY Top Plane View button to view the model in the Top view.

38 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

7. Within the Results Browser, right click and select Create > View.
This creates a new folder called Views with a single saved view called View 1.

8. Within the Standard Views toolbar, select the Isometric View button, , to change
the view to the Isometric view.
9. Right click on Views in the Results Browser and select Create > View.
This creates a second view named View 2.

10. Click on the icons next to View 1 and View 2 to recall the selected view.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 39


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Step 6: Use the mouse controls


1. While holding in the ctrl key and the left mouse button, drag the cursor to rotate the
model.
2. While holding in the ctrl key and the right mouse button, drag the cursor to pan the
model.
3. While holding in the ctrl key and the middle mouse button, circle a portion of the
model to zoom in.
4. While holding in the ctrl key, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in at the cursor location
5. While holding in the ctrl key, click the middle mouse button to fit the model to the
screen.

Step 7: Change the Window Layout and load files.

1. Click the drop down next to the Page Window Layout button .

2. Select the two window layout .


3. Activate the new window.
4. Load the bumper_0000.rad and bumperA001 files in the new window by clicking
Apply in the Load Model panel.

Step 8: Change the view in multiple windows simultaneously using Synchronized


View.

1. From the Page Controls toolbar, select the Synchronized View button, .
This opens a window that allows you to select which windows should be synchronized.

40 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

2. Both windows are selected by default, so simply click OK.

3. Select the YX Rear Plane View to display the rear view for the two windows.

4. Click the Isometric View button and zoom in/out the model to change the view.

5. Click the Synchronized View button to turn off the synchronization.


6. Make the left window active by clicking in it and then rotate the model.
Only the model in window 1 in the graphics area rotates.

Step 9: Save the session to a session file.


1. From the File menu, select Save As > Session.
2. Specify a path and the name 2a-practice for the *.mvw file and click Save.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 41


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

4 - Browsers and Entity Attributes


In this section, you will learn how to:
 Use the Browser and Entity Attributes

4.1 - Browsers
• Browsers display information in a tree view; collectors such as components or groups
appear at the top level of the hierarchy, while collected entities such as elements or
surfaces display as "children" nested within the collector to which they belong.
• Different browsers are customized for usage with regard to the types of parts that you want
to work with.
• Most browsers have similar basic functionality for sorting entities, filtering entities, and
finding entities and include a context-sensitive right-click menu and sets of control
buttons.

42 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

4.2 - Display Controls & Browser Modes

These controls affect which entities display in the graphics area, and how they display (such as
shaded or wireframe).

 The Global Display Tools can be used to turn the display of large numbers of entities
on and off.

 The Local Display Controls affect the visual style of individual entities (such as shaded
or wireframe) within the tree list.

 Entity Display Icons

 Colors

 Display Mode

 The Action Mode Tools allow you to turn entities' display on and off individually, isolate
certain entities so that only they appear in the graphics area, or add entities to panel
collectors.

 The Sorting Entities allows you to sort the entities in a folder by clicking on the heading
of each column.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 43


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

4.3 - Results Browser Views


Within the Results browser there are five predefined browser view modes (which are accessed
via the first row of icons within the Results browser):

Files View
Files View displays all loaded model files and allows you to:
• Change the visibility of models
• Delete models
• Change the current model
• View the model status on the current model or on the marked model file

• Click to close the Files view

44 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Model View
Model View displays all loaded model files and allows you to:
• Standard view mode for the Results browser.
• Tree-like display of all entities within the model (assemblies, components/parts, systems,
entity sets/groups, and streamline components) as well as all tracking systems,
measures, notes, section cuts, available load cases and simulations, derived load cases,
plot styles, results, and views.
• Right click functionality - Show/Hide, Isolate/Isolate Only, etc.
• This view also includes full display control for all applicable entities (same as in
Component view):
• Load Cases
• Plot Styles
• Results
• Views

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 45


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

• Global Display Controls Tools.

• Change the Color and Shading Method of Components.

46 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Model View + Entity Editor


• The Entity Editor section of the Results browser allows you to view and edit various
entity conditions/properties. Click on an entity in the upper portion of the browser to
automatically display the properties assigned to that entity in the Entity Editor (located
in the lower half of the browser).
• The Model view must be active within the Results browser in order to access the Entity
Editor.
• The Entity Editor is turned on and displayed in the browser by default; however you can
hide the editor by clicking on the show/hide toggle.
• The Entity Editor can be resized vertically and horizontally by clicking on the line that
separates the editor from the browser or graphics area.
• The entity categories/properties that are displayed under the Name and Value headers
will vary, depending upon the type of entity that is selected (Components/Parts,
Measures, Notes, Section Cuts, Sets).
• Any changes made to an entity property will automatically be applied to the model as
you enter the information.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 47


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

• Change Attributes or Create Entities needed.

• Components/Parts Attributes.

• Sets Attributes

48 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

• Section Cuts Attributes

• Notes Attributes

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 49


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Component View
• This Component View turns off all other entities in the browser and lists only
components in a flat list (by default).
• Assembly hierarchy and systems can also be configured to show in this view by
selecting the options in Configure Browser > Entities > Entity Type.
• This view includes full display control for all applicable entities (same as in Model
view).
• Colors Model “by Component”
• Quickly Sort by Name, ID, Color, or Property
• Display State Icons (Geometry and FE: ON/OFF Single Picking)
• Global Controls to Operate on all Components (All, None, Reverse)

50 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Load Case View


• The Load Case View is a hierarchical listing of all available load cases and simulations
• You can create a new derived load case by using the browser context menu. If you
create a derived load case the currently selected load cases and/or simulations will
automatically be added to it.
• Once a derived load case is created you can rename it by using the Rename option in
the browser context menu.
• You can also add simulations and/or load cases using the drag & drop method.
• You can change the scale factor on the simulations by selecting the simulation and
right-clicking in the scale factor column.
• Derived load cases can also be deleted by using the Delete option in context menu.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 51


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Result View
• The Result View shows a hierarchical view of available results on the current load
case. The result types are grouped by their type, and are broken up into scalar, vector,
and tensor folders.
• Result types and components have a checkbox next to them indicating the type of
result plot it will apply by clicking it. The result plot will be based on the current plot
style.
• A plot style is basically a predefinition of settings applied on plot. You can change the
current style by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the plot button in the Quick Plot
browser toolbar.
• The predefined plot styles come initially from a file in your HyperWorks installation
directory. You can export your own plot styles and make them your default by bringing
up the browser context menu and clicking Export Plot Styles. The styles will be written
out in XML format to a file you define.
• You can use these styles as your own default by changing the DefaultPlotStyles line in
your preference file.

52 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

4.4 - Results Browser Context-Sensitive Menu


• Clicking the right mouse button on a folder or entity/item within the browser’s tree
structure allows you to change a variety of options. The visibility of browser context
menu items is dependent on the current selection. Result types and components have
a checkbox next to them indicating the type of result plot it will apply by clicking it. The
result plot will be based on the current plot style.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 53


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

5 - Masking Elements
In this section, you will learn how to use the HyperView Display toolbar and Mask panel.
Display Toolbar
This toolbar is turned on by selecting View > Toolbars > HyperView > Display. By default,
this toolbar is displayed vertically on the left side of the graphics window.
Below the masking tools within this toolbar are highlighted:

The Mask panel ( ) allows you to mask elements, components, and systems to reduce the
number of entities displayed on the screen. With fewer entities displayed on the screen, it is
easier to pick the necessary elements or visualize important areas of a model.

The options on the left side of the Mask panel apply to the entity type designated by the input
collector (Elements, Components, Systems, or Assemblies). You can mask or unmask a
defined selection set or all entities of that type. Once a set is defined by using the input
collector or by picking entities from the screen, you can mask or unmask the entire set of
entities using Mask Selected or Unmask Selected. If you use the quick window selection to
select entities, the active Action option (Mask or Unmask) is automatically applied to the
entities inside the window.
When a component is completely masked, the display status updates in the model. When a
component is partially masked or displayed on the screen, the display status is on. The display
status is shown in the Results Browser or the Entity List Tree in the Entity Attributes panel.

54 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

The options on the far right of the panel can be used to globally mask or unmask all entities in the results
browser. The options are:
 Mask All Masks all elements, components, and systems
 Unmask All Unmasks all elements, components, and systems
 Mask Not Shown Masks the displayed elements or systems that are not shown in
the graphics area
 Unmask Shown Unmasks previously masked entities that currently fit into the
graphics window
You can apply a mask to all models in the view by activating the Apply to all models option,
located in the lower left corner of the Mask panel. This option is only available if the Overlay
option on the Load Model panel is activated, and more than one model has been loaded in the
window. If the Apply to all models option is not activated, the mask will be applied to the
active model only.

The other masking tools within the Display toolbar are listed below with a description of their
functionality:

Reverse Elements
• Reverses the mask state of all elements currently displayed.

Unmask Adjacent
• Unmasks the row of elements adjacent to the currently displayed one. If some of the
unmasked elements reside in components which are currently not displayed, those
components will also be unmasked.

Unmask All
• Unmasks all elements, components, and systems.

Mask Not Shown (left mouse button)


• Masks the displayed elements or systems that are not shown in the graphics area.
- OR -
Unmask Shown (right mouse button)
• Unmasks previously masked entities that currently fit into the graphics window.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 55


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

6 - Creating and Using Sets


In this section, you will learn how to:
 Create a set
 Display sets
 Import and export created sets
Using the Set panel, you can create, import, and export sets (or groups) of components,
elements, and nodes.
You can Create and Review Sets in the following ways:

6.1 - Visualization Toolbar > Sets

You can create as many sets (groups) as you want, and the same entity can exist in multiple
sets.

56 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Sets List
The Sets List is on the left-most side of the panel. Activating the check box next to the set will
display it in the graphics area. The set type is also shown in this listing. You can sort the items
in the Sets list by clicking on the Sets or Type headings.

Selection
Sets are assigned a color and every entity within that set is displayed in the selected color when
the set is turned on. There is the option to turn on the display of the ID by selecting Show ID.
There are also different Draw styles for each entity selected. For example, when Components
are selected, the Draw style options are shaded or wire.
The Draw size allows you to change the thickness of the wire and the size of the point/sphere
being drawn for the active set.
Entities can either be added or removed from the set. This is determined by selecting the
Action as either Add or Remove. Finally, a set can be emptied by selecting Clear.
Another nice feature of this panel is the Number of entities field. This lists the number of
entities in the active set.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 57


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Import…
You can import HyperView group definition files, Animator3 session files, LSPost group files, or
Patran session files into HyperView by selecting the Import button. This opens the following
window:

From the Select format drop-down menu, the file type to be imported is selected. In order to
import an Animator3, Patran session, or LSPost group file, you must first load a model. You can
import more than one of these file into the same session.

Export…
To export a HyperView Group definition file, click on the Export button.
The file types that are supported for export are HyperView, Patran, Nastran, and Optistruct.
HyperView group definition files can be edited.
This opens the following window:

In addition, the contents of a saved set file can be added, removed, or modified using the
session file.

58 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Exercise 2b - Applying Entity Attributes, Masking, and Creating


Groups
This exercise uses the model file, C2500R-V8-Altair-2013_0000.rad and the
corresponding C2500R-V8-Altair-2013A001 file as the results file.

Step 1: Turning components on and off from the Results Browser.


1. Load the …\Model-files\1a-truck\C2500R-V8-Altair-2013_0000.rad model file
and the C2500R-V8-Altair-2013A001 results file from the 1a-truck folder.

2. In the Results Browser, click to activate the Show/Hide mode.


3. Right-click on the bed of the truck in the graphics area.
The component is hidden from display.

4. Left-click in the area of the truck bed to show the component.


Note: Holding down the left mouse button will generate a wire frame highlight of a hidden
component.
5. Expand the tree under Components by clicking the ‘+’ icon in the Results Browser.
6. Right-click on SHELL: BED, and select Hide or uncheck the “Visibility” option from the
Entity Editor.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 59


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

The component is no longer displayed in the graphics area.


7. Right-click on SHELL: BED and select Show.
The component is turned back on.
8. Select the Components folder.

9. Click the Display none button to turn off all components.

10. Click Display all to turn on the display of all components.

Step 2: Isolating components using the Results Browser.

1. Click to activate the Isolate tool.


2. Click on SHELL: BED in the HyperView Results Browser.
The component is isolated in the graphics area.

3. Click again to deactivate Isolate.


4. Right-click on SHELL: CABIN and select Isolate.
The cabin is isolated in the graphics area.
5. Right-click on the Components folder and select Show.
All components are displayed in the graphics area.

Step 3: Changing the display style and attributes from the Results Browser.

1. Right-click on the Style icon for SHELL: BED.

60 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

2. Select the Shaded mode from the display Style pop-up menu.

3. Right-click on the color box for the SHELL: BED component.


4. Select a new color from the color palette.
The color of the component is changed.

Step 4: Masking and Unmasking elements using the graphics area.

1. Click the Mask panel button on the toolbar.


2. Verify that the entity input collector is set to Elements.
3. Under Action, verify that the Mask option is turned on.
4. Press the SHIFT key and the left mouse button, and drag the mouse in the graphics area,
to draw a window over a specific area of the model.
5. Release the mouse button.
The elements that were chosen, using the quick window selection mode, are masked and
are no longer displayed on the screen.
6. Under Action, turn on the Unmask option.
7. Press the SHIFT key and the left mouse button, and drag the mouse in the graphics area,
to draw a window over the area of the model where the elements are currently masked.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 61
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

8. Release the mouse button.


The elements enclosed in the window are unmasked.
9. Click the Unmask All button, to unmask all elements of the model.
10. Change the entity input collector from Elements to Components.
11. In the graphics area, pick the truck bed and the right rear tire of the model.
12. Click the Mask Selected button.

13. Press the SHIFT key and the left mouse button, and drag the mouse in the graphics area,
to draw a window over a specific area of the model.
14. Release the mouse button.
The components enclosed in the window are masked.
Note: You can also use the quick window selection mode to choose alternate selection
methods.
15. Turn the Unmask option on.
16. Press the SHIFT key and the left mouse button, and drag the mouse in the graphics area,
to draw a window over the area of the model where the elements are currently masked.
Upon release of the mouse button, the masked components enclosed in the window are
unmasked.
17. Click the Unmask All button, to unmask all selected components.
Note: When you load more than one model using the Overlay option, the Apply to all
models option is made available. This option allows you to mask entities across all
models when activated. If the Apply to all models option is not activated, the mask
is applied only to the active model.

Step 5: Masking elements using the entity input collector.


1. Under Action, turn the Mask option back on.
2. Verify that the entity input collector is set to Components.
3. In the graphics area, pick the roof of the truck.
4. Click on Components, to access the extended entity selection menu.

62 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

5. Select By Attached from the selection list.


6. Click the Mask Selected button.

7. Click the Reject button.


The masked components are rejected and unmasked.

Step 6: Create and export a set (group) of components.


1. Click Model > Create > Sets, a new set will be created in the Model View and it will be
highlighted.
2. Left click on it to define this set in the Entity Editor.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 63


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

3. Go to the Label field of the new set and rename it as truck1.

4. Go to the Entity IDs field to define the set.


5. Verify that the Selection option is set to Components.
6. In the graphics area, pick the truck bed and the rear tire of the model.

7. The chosen entities are added to the set truck1. Make visible this set, check the option
“Visibility”.
Observe that the feature lines of the chosen components are the same color as the color
that is displayed in the Color box, in the panel area.

64 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

8. Add another set, and rename it truck 2.

9. Go to the Entity IDs field to define the set.


10. Verify that the Selection option is set to Components.
11. In the graphics area pick the side door and the roof of the truck.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 65


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

12. The chosen entities are added to the set truck2. Make visible this set, check the option
“Visibility”.
Observe that the feature lines of the chosen components are the same color as the color
that is displayed in the Color box, in the panel area.

13. Go to the Color field to change the color.


Observe the difference in the feature lines of the components in the set (group) truck 2.
Note: If you would like to change the color of the feature lines for the chosen components,
simply click the color box and select a new color from the color palette.

14. Go to the Draw Style field to change it. Select shaded from the list.
Observe that the components are now shaded the color defined in the set “truck2”.

66 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

15. From the Visualization toolbar , select the Set icon to


open the Set panel.
16. Click Export…, to export the created sets (truck1, truck2).
The Export Sets dialog is displayed.

17. Verify that Select format is set to HyperView.

18. Click on the file browser icon .


19. Enter groups.txt as the file name.
20. Click Save.
21. Click OK to close the Export Sets dialog.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 67


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Step 7: Import a created set.


1. From the File Menu, select New > Session to start a new HyperView session.
Answer Yes to the question "This operation will discard all current session data. Continue
with new session?".
2. Load the C2500R-V8-Altair-2013A001 results file from the 1a-truck folder.
3. Go to the Set panel.
4. Click Import… to import a saved set.
5. Verify that Select format is set to HyperView.

6. Click on the file browser icon .


7. Select the groups.txt file.

8. Click Open.
9. Click OK to import the selected file and close the Import Sets dialog.
Observe that both the truck1 and truck2 sets are imported.

Activating either of the check boxes, using Entity Editor, will display the components,
feature lines, and colors of each set (group) on the screen accordingly.

68 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Step 8: Viewing the components in a set from the Results Browser.


1. From the Results Browser, right-click on the Components folder and select Hide.
2. Right-click on the Sets folder and select Hide.
3. Expand the Sets folder.
4. Right-click on the truck1 set and select Show.
5. Right-click on the truck2 set and select Show.
The truck1 and truck2 imported sets are now displayed.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 69


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

7 – User Defined Systems


This section will cover:
 User Defined Coordinate Systems
 HyperView Coordinate Systems & System Review Dialog

7.1 - User Defined Coordinate Systems


The User Defined System dialog allows you to define your own coordinate systems and save
the origin and orientation of these systems as a Session file or a Report.
The dialog can be accessed three different ways:
 From the Model menu select Create > Systems.

 Right-click anywhere within the graphics area and select Create > System from the
context menu.

 Right-click in a blank area within the Results browser and select Create > System.

70 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

If your model contains user defined systems, you can right-click on one of the existing systems
and select Create > System, Edit, or Delete, from the context menu.

Results Browser User Defined Coordinate Systems Context Menu

When creating the system, there are three different types available.
These are Rectangular (X, Y, Z), Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z), and Spherical (R, Theta, Phi).
Once the Type has been set, the Method by which the coordinate system is to be created is
selected. There are two options for this: By node or By coordinates.
The By node option allows you to graphically select the nodes that define the Origin, X-Axis,
and XY-Plane.
When By coordinates is selected, the coordinates for the Origin, X-Axis, and XY-Plane are
specified.
You can also Edit a user defined coordinate system.
 Results Browser, right click on a system and select Edit.
When a system is edited, the Type can be changed or the nodes defining the system can be
modified by selecting new nodes.
Only user defined coordinate systems can be modified.
Coordinate systems from the input deck cannot be modified, they can only be reviewed.
If a system from an input deck is selected, the following will be displayed in the System window:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 71


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

One of the things done with a user defined system is performing a stress transformation using
that system.
This is done using the Contour panel and the Resolved in option.
The available options for Resolved in are the Analysis System, Global System, and User
Defined System.
When the User Defined System is selected, the System selector becomes active so that the
system can be selected graphically or by its ID.

7.2 - HyperView Coordinate Systems


In the Contour, Iso Value, Tensor Plot, Vector Plot and Deformed panels you can select the
result coordinate system to be used to process results.
Subsequent options are dependent on the current averaging method.
The available coordinate systems are:
 Global
 Element
 Material
 Ply
 Analysis
 User

72 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

7.3 - HyperView System Review Dialog


The System Review dialog allows you to review the orientations of various element systems
(1D, 2D, or 3D), as well as material and ply systems.
Reviewing these systems enables you to assess the integrity of model and understand the
results in significance to the system of interest.
The system plots (many options to customize appearance) can be overlaid with Vector and
Tensor plots to confirm that the results and their orientations are accurate.

The dialog can be accessed in different ways:

 System (review dialog) icon , Results toolbar

 From the Results menu select Plot > System (menu bar)

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 73


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

8 - Graphical Manipulators
A graphical manipulator allows you to modify specific items directly in the graphics area using
interactive tools.
Graphical manipulators are currently supported in the Section Cut panel, the Streamlines
panel, and the Image Planes tab.
To use graphical manipulators, select them with the mouse and drag them to perform an
operation. Each manipulator will have different operations available.
For example, to translate a section cut along an axis, select the arrow pointing in the desired
direction and drag it with the mouse.

8.1 - Display State of Graphical Manipulators


Graphical manipulators are convenient for moving, changing orientations, and resizing entities
where applicable. Only one manipulator can be active at any time (be it for section cuts,
streamline rakes, or image planes). Since the manipulator modifies a specific item, like a
section cut out of many section cuts in the model, the context to show or hide is dependent
upon certain rules.
 A manipulator is displayed every time a new entity (section cut, streamline/rake, image
plane) is created. If a manipulator is already shown on the screen for another entity, the
creation process will hide that manipulator and display the manipulator for the new
entity.
 The manipulator is automatically hidden every time the display of the entity to which it is
attached is turned off.
 Context Menu > Show Manipulator:
 Available in the Results browser and also as a right-click menu option in the
Section Cut and Streamlines panel. Displays the manipulator for the selected
item.
 If the individual item is not currently displayed, the manipulator and item are turned
"on" using the Show Manipulator context menu option.
 If a manipulator is displayed elsewhere, the context menu activation will hide the old
item and make the current object and its selection the active one.
 Once activated using the context menu, the manipulator display can be turned “off”
by using the Hide Maniplator right-click context menu option or whenever a new
entity (section cut, streamline/rake, or image plane) is created.
 Context Menu > Hide Manipulator:
 Available in the Results browser and also as a right-click menu option in the
Section Cut and Streamlines panel and Image Planes tab. Hides the manipulator
for the selected item.
 Available in the graphics area right-click context menu. Turns off the display of any
manipulator that is currently active.

74 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Below you can find some Manipulators available:


Using the Set panel, you can create, import, and export sets (or groups) of components,
elements, and nodes.
 Two Directional Manipulator
The Two Directional manipulator is available for X-Axis, Y-Axis, Z-Axis section cuts
only.

The Two Directional manipulator is available in the Streamlines panel for evenly
distributed Area rakes only.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 75


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

 Three Directional Manipulator


The Three Directional manipulator is available for N1, N2, N3 and Normal to screen
section cuts. This manipulator allows free rotations and translations in a 3-D space for
relocating and reorienting cross sections.

The Three Directional manipulator is available in the Streamlines panel for Plane rakes.

 Line Manipulator
The Line manipulator is available in the Streamlines panel for Line rakes only.

76 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

 2D Manipulator
The 2D manipulator is a rectangular planar area encompassing the image/video
selected (with four corner square handles and two centered arrows).

2D Image Plane Manipulator

 3D Manipulator
The 3D manipulator (which is made up of three centered arrows, arc handles, and
square handles) allows you to make incremental adjustments to the rotating plane or
move the image plane in 3-D space. This manipulator is created based upon the nodes
specified using the 2 Point node input collector (N1N2 and IN1IN2) or the 3 Point node
input collector (N1N2N3 and IN1IN2IN3).

3D Image Plane Manipulator

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 77


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

9 - Symmetry
Symmetry visualization allows partially modeled geometry to be shown in full extent by reflection
and or duplication.
The Symmetry dialog allows you to define options which can be used to visualize what a whole
model would look like when you are only using a half, quarter, or a partial segment of the model.
 Symmetry – multiple planes of reflection
 Rectangular and Circular copy
 User defined reference planes of reflection and copy
 Order dependent duplication (reflect, copy)

Example of a sports car half-model with streamlines and particle tracing displayed (on the left) and its
symmetric reflection (on the right).

You can also select individual parts for symmetry visualization, instead of an entire model.
The visualization mode is valid for quasi-static, modal, and transient analyses animations,
with any result plot (contour/vector/tensor/iso) also duplicated on the symmetric geometry.
In addition, the mirror reflection and rectangular/circular array order can be controlled as
relevant for the analysis.

To access the Symmetry dialog, click Symmetry on the Visualization toolbar, or


select the Symmetry option from the Model view menu (Model > Symmetry).

78 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

Symmetry dialog - Rectangular tab Symmetry dialog - Circular tab

The various options available in the dialog allow you to define multiple planes of symmetry
and also pick a coordinate system to reflect or copy in rectangular/circular manner.

See Online Help > Symmetry dialog for additional information regarding using this dialog.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 79


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 2: Animation and View Controls

80 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Chapter 3

Strength Analysis
This chapter covers the topics that are generally used when viewing results from a strength
analysis.
Various panels and tools will be explored to allow you to interpret the results.
HyperView with its open architecture generally reflects the results as shown by the native post-
processor.
However, the options available to you vary from panel to panel based on the file loaded and the
result type you are interested in.
This chapter helps you understand the various panels that can be used and customized by you
to visualize and interpret your strength results.
This chapter will cover the following topics:
 Contour Plots
 Tensor Plots
 Querying Results
 Creating Annotations & Measures
 Result Math
 Derived Load Cases

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 81


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

1 - Contour Plots
A contour plot generates color bands on the model, based on the values found in the results file.
A contour plot can be created from tensor, scalar, vector, or complex results.
There are different ways to contour results in HyperView:

• Contour icon on the Results toolbar


• Results > Plot > Contour from the menu bar
• Results browser > Result View > Plot > Contour
There are advantages to using each tool.
Below a look at each tool is shown and the advantages are discussed.

1.1 - Contour icon & Results > Plot > Contour from the menu bar.

The Contour panel allows you to create contour plots of a model and graphically visualize the
analysis results.
In the Contour panel you can view vector, tensor, or scalar type results.

To access the Contour panel either click the Contour icon on the Results toolbar, or
select Results > Plot > Contour from the menu bar.
The options in the panel will vary, depending on the type of model and results files that are
loaded.

This panel, like most panels in HyperView, works from left to right.

82 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

First the Result type is defined, then the Selection and Resolved in system is selected, and
finally the Averaging method is defined.
After these setting, the display and legend options are defined.

Result type

This section allows you to select the result data type and the corresponding data component
type that should be used to calculate contours.
Use the first drop-down menu under Result type to select one of the available result types.
The options change depending on the currently loaded result file.
Each result type is followed by a letter that indicates the category to which it belongs:
 (t) indicates a tensor-type result, such as stress or strain tensors.
 (v) indicates a vector-type result, such as displacement, velocity, and acceleration.
 (s) indicates a scalar-type result.
 (c) indicates complex results.

The expansion button opens the Choose From List dialog where you can filter result types
for quick selection.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 83


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The second drop-down menu in the Result type section allows you to choose the data
component type (X, Y, Mag, …). The list of available components is based on the selected
result type.
For example:

There is also an option, Layers that allows you to allows you to calculate and display how many
layers/plies are in each element.
When used with a Value Filter, the Count aggregation mode will return the number of layers
that meet the specified criteria. This can be a useful tool when trying to determine how many
layers/plies are failing or exceeding certain threshold criteria.

The contour will be applied to all layers defined in the model. If an element has no layer
definition, as in a mass or solid, the contour is also displayed regardless of which layer is
selected.
The Count option can be used in conjunction with the Layer filter and the Value filter
options (located in the middle of the panel), in order to further specify or define the plies/layers
to be included in the count results (see the examples below):

Contour example with the Count option applied

84 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Contour/Iso example with the Count option and an iso value applied

The final option available under the Result type heading is the Use corner data checkbox.
This option is only active when corner data is available in the results file. When this option is
selected, HyperView displays color bands by interpolating available corner results within each
element. This allows for a discontinuity of the result distribution across element boundaries to
be seen.
Mid-side Node Elemental Results in Contour
Mid-side nodes refers to the nodes in between the corner nodes of the 2nd order elements.
HyperView presents all the corner and mid-side node results when the Use Corner Data option
is checked in the Contour panel. However, if the solvers do not output mid-side node results
(such as NASTRAN and Optistruct), HyperView will calculate the middle node stress and strain
as follows:
 The stress and strain tensor of the middle nodes are the average of the corner nodes
tensor.

Note: The mid-side nodes in the example above are: A5, A6, A7, and A8

 Invariant values of the mid-side nodes (vonMises and principal) are calculated using
their tensor values.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 85


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Selection

Before creating a contour plot, you may pick one or more entities from the model. You can do
this by picking entities directly from the screen, using the quick window selection, or clicking the
Elements, Components, or Assemblies input collector and using the extended entity
selection menu.
If no selection is made, the contour will be applied to displayed components or elements by
default.

Resolved in

This drop-down menu allows you to select the result coordinate system to be used to contour
the results. The available options are dependent on the current selection for the Averaging
method.
You can select the analysis, element, or global coordinate system as well as a user-defined
system. The System input collector is enabled when User System is selected.
 Global System (proj: none): Transforms to the global system.
(proj: none) indicates that no projection rule is selected for shells. When a projection
rule is selected (using the Projection Rule… button) it is displayed, for example, (proj:
y, x).
 Elemental System: Transforms results to the element coordinate system. In
HyperView, the element coordinate system is defined by element connectivity.
 Material System: Transforms to the material system. This option is only available when
the Result-Math template > Advanced is selected in the Load Model panel and a
solver input deck is loaded.
 Ply System: Transforms to the ply system. This option is only available when the
Result-Math template > Advanced template is selected in the Load Model panel and a
solver input deck is loaded.
 Analysis System: Displays the vector and tensor results as they are output from the
solver.
 User System: This option is available when the results file contains a user-defined
coordinate system. Click the System input collector to select a system by ID or pick from
the screen. Note: Markers can also be selected for MBD models.
(proj: none) indicates that no projection rule is selected for shells. When a projection
rule is selected (using the Projection Rule… button) it is displayed, for example, (proj:
y, x).
86 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

 Use tracking system: If a tracking system has been activated in the Tracking panel,
the Use tracking system option is enabled. If you activate this option, the results will
be transformed and resolved in the activated tracking system. This option is not
available if you are using the Modal or Linear Static animation mode.

Averaging Method

Nodal averaging of elemental results is available in HyperView. Nodal averaging of elemental


results at a node refers to the average of all the element corner results passing through that
node. If no corner results are available for an element, centroidal results will be used to
calculate the nodal average.
In the example below, four elements are passing through Node 400. The average result at
Node 400 is equal to:

There are several options for the Averaging Method within the Contour panel; None, Simple,
Maximum, Minimum, Advanced, Difference, Max of corner and Min of corner.
None: No averaging method is used. Color will be displayed in element-based results, a solid
color for centroid results, or multiple color bands within an element.
Simple: Simple averaging means that tensor and vector components are extracted and the
invariants are computed prior to averaging.
Maximum: Extracts the maximum values from the surrounding elements attached to a node.
The tensor and vector components are extracted and the invariants are computed for each
element (or corner) prior to averaging to a node. For results components, the corresponding
components from each element corner (or centroid) are extracted and then the maximum value
is assigned to the shared node. For invariants, the corresponding invariants are calculated from
each tensor at the element corners and then the maximum value is assigned to the node.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 87


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Minimum: Extracts the minimum values from the surrounding elements attached to a node. The
tensor and vector components are extracted and the invariants are computed for each element
(or corner) prior to averaging to a node. For results components, the corresponding components
from each element corner (or centroid) are extracted and then the minimum value is assigned to
the shared node. For invariants, the corresponding invariants are calculated from each tensor at
the element corners and then the minimum value is assigned to the node.
Advanced: Tensor or vector results are transformed into a consistent system and then each
component is averaged separately to obtain an average tensor or vector. The invariants are
calculated from this averaged tensor or vector.
Difference: The nodal difference is the difference between the maximum and minimum corner
results at a node. For tensor/vector components, the corresponding components from each
element corner are extracted and the difference is calculated. For invariants, the corresponding
invariants are computed from each element corner and then the difference is calculated. The
sign of a value is considered in the difference calculation. For example, the difference for the
values, 200, 400, -100, and -500 is 900.

Max of corner: Extracts the maximum value from all the corners of an element and the value is
shown at the centroid of the element. The tensor and vector components are extracted and the
invariants are computed for each corner prior to assigning to the element centroid. For result
components, the corresponding components from each corner is extracted and then the
maximum value is assigned to the element centroid. For invariants, the corresponding
invariants are calculated from each tensor at the element corners and then the maximum value
is assigned at the centroid. This averaging option is only available when the Use corner data
option is checked. The Variation option is automatically disabled for this averaging method.

Min of corner: Extracts the minimum value from all the corners of an element and the value is
shown at the centroid of the element. The tensor and vector components are extracted and the
invariants are computed for each corner prior to assigning to the element centroid. For result
components, the corresponding components from each corner is extracted and then the
minimum value is assigned to the element centroid. For invariants, the corresponding invariants
are calculated from each tensor at the element corners and then the minimum value is assigned
at the centroid. This averaging option is only available when the Use corner data option is
checked. The Variation option is automatically disabled for this averaging method.

Extreme of corner: Extracts the extreme value from all the corners of an element and the value
is shown at the centroid of the element. The tensor and vector components are extracted and
88 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

the invariants are computed for each corner prior to assigning to the element centroid. For
result components, the corresponding components from each corner is extracted and then the
extreme value is assigned to the element centroid. For invariants, the corresponding invariants
are calculated from each tensor at the element corners and then the extreme value is assigned
at the centroid. This averaging option is only available when the Use corner data option is
checked. The Variation option is automatically disabled for this averaging method.

Variations (%): The Variation % is the relative difference at a node with respect to all nodes in
the selected components. The formula is described as follows:

You can activate Variation (%) in the Contour panel and select a specific variation percentage
to control the nodal averaging calculation.
If Variation (%) is off, the average results are calculated for all nodes. In this case, the results
are node bound, meaning you can query results at a node from the Query panel.
If Variation (%) is on, the average results are calculated for only some nodes, depending on the
variation (%) you have defined.
If the variation percentage is below the designated value at a node, nodal average at that node
is calculated. Otherwise, corresponding element corner results at that node are used for contour
plotting.
100% Variation indicates all nodes will have average results; 0% Variation indicates no nodes
will have average results. In this case, the results are element bound, meaning you can only
query results at an element from the Query panel.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 89


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Averaging Options

The averaging options allow you to limit the averaging of results to only a group of elements that
are considered to be bound by same feature angle or face.
Typically averaging is performed for all connected elements in a part without any regard for
adjacent elements that are modeled around sharp edges or T-connections.
Click Averaging Options (located in the middle of the panel) to display the Averaging Options
dialog.

Note: Feature angle averaging is only applicable when the Simple or Advanced averaging
methods are used, and no Variation is selected. As the nodes shared by elements that do not
meet the feature angle criteria can have different values on either side of the feature angle, the
output is always presented as corner bound values on each element.
The options available are:
Feature angle averaging: Activate this option to specify the threshold value for elements to be
considered as part of the same feature by specifying a Feature angle value. All of the adjacent
elements whose normals are less than or equal to the threshold value are averaged. The output
of this contour is always corner based data (no centroid values).
A feature angle average calculation example is shown below:

90 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Result at common node 3440:


•E 3115, average of corner nodes for element 3115 and 3117
•E 3121, average of corner nodes for element 3121 and 3124
•E 3117, average of corner nodes for element 3115 and 3117
•E 3124, average of corner nodes for element 3121 and 3124

Feature angle: Allows you to specify the value to be used in the Feature angle averaging
calculations. The default is 30 degrees. All of the elements whose normals are less or equal to
the specified threshold value are averaged. The value can range from 0 to 180 degrees.
For element feature angle calculation, the current model position is used. Only shell elements
feature angles are considered, therefore all solid and beam elements will be included in the
averaging calculation (see the example below):

The result at common node 20983 = the average of corner nodes for all four elements.

Ignore flipped normals: This option is checked by default (for feature based averaging) to
allow for any modeling discrepancies to be disregarded.
Consider the picture and description below which shows two adjacent elements whose normals
are flipped as a consequence of a model setup discrepancy:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 91


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

In the example above, the feature angle threshold for averaging is set at 30 degrees. The
image on the left side has an angle between adjacent element normals close to 180 degrees
and therefore does not meet the criteria of the 30 degree threshold. The image on the right has
the angle between normals less than 30 degrees, and the threshold criteria for feature angle is
satisfied. However, this could be a modeling discrepancy that should be accounted for, perhaps
allowing the averaging of values for elements on the left image, but not allowing averaging of
elements on the right image. This can be accomplished by activating the Ignore flipped normals
option.
If strict adherence to the angle between adjacent element normals is to be enforced, then
uncheck this option.
See the examples provided below:

Envelope trace plot

This option allows you to trace the results from envelope subcases or simulations depending on
the option selected. For this option to be enabled, an envelope derived load case needs to be
created. Once it is created and it is the current subcase, the options available are:
None – No Envelope subcases or simulations are tracked
Subcase – The results are tracked from an Envelope subcase
Simulation – The results are tracked from an Envelope simulation.
Below is an image of an envelope Subcase tracing. Notice how the contour plot represents
only two values. These values correspond to either Subcase 1 or Subcase 2. Where the
contour plot represents Subcase 1, this indicates that the value in the envelope subcase comes
from Subcase 1. While when Subcase 2 is contoured, the result comes from Subcase 2.

92 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Value Filter
The Value filter available in the Contour panel allows you to specify threshold criteria for
processing results only in a specific range. The Value filter discards any values not meeting
the specified criteria.
There are three possible modes to specify a criteria: greater than or equal to (>=), less than or
equal to (<=), or a Range.
The results will be displayed on entities (like nodes, elements, or systems) only when the value
criteria is met. By default, no filter is applied (None).
The Value filter is similar to that of an iso surface when processing results, with the difference
being that no result is shown for the entities that do not meet the criteria (instead of removing
those entities from display).
The Value filter can be a useful tool for isolating the 'hotspot' areas. Using this filter along with
the Count aggregation mode, allows you to count the number of layers meeting a certain criteria
(for example, counting the number of plies exceeding a failure index).

The Value filter options allow you to specify threshold criteria for processing results only in a
specific range.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 93


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Any entities having values outside of filter parameters will be displayed as gray in the graphics
area.
The Value filter options can be used in conjunction with the Count and Layer filter , in
order to determine which layers/plies are failing or exceeding certain threshold criteria.

94 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Display Options

The Display options change the appearance of the contour colors and are automatically applied
to the model as you enter information.
Discrete color produces discrete color bands on the contour plots with distinct boundaries
between the contour levels. This option uses a texture mapping capability in your graphics card.
If your graphics card does not support texture mapping, the performance may slow down.
Interpolate colors interpolates the contour colors from the undeformed shape (with a zero
value) to the result variable reported from the solver. If you do not select Interpolate colors,
the contour colors remain the same for all frames. This is only applied to modal and linear static
animation.

Legend Threshold
Legend values can be changed using the Legend threshold options.

A new maximum value can be entered by activating the Max checkbox and entering a new
value. The same is true with the Min option.
The Multiplier option is used to scale all the result values. An additional line will be added to
the legend if a multiplier value is entered.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 95


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Another option is the Offset value. The Offset value affects the contour value, contour
min/max, and the legend min/max. An additional line will be added to the legend if an Offset
value is entered.
The Offset value option can be useful for:
 Converting temperatures from Kelvin to Celsius
 Converting temperatures from Kelvin to Fahrenheit (by using the Offset and Multiplier
options)
 Calculating factor of safety as (1-stress/allowable stress), etc.
NOTE: The Multiplier takes affect first, therefore you can perform operations like y=mx+C on
the contour (where m is the Multiplier and C is the Offset).
There is also the Edit Legend option. The Edit Legend dialog allows you to change the color
band, format, and descriptions for the legend.

Available options include setting the Legend Type to Fixed Scale or Dynamic Scale. Fixed
Scale displays a global maximum and minimum value in the legend for all the timesteps.
Dynamic Scale changes the legend with respect to the maximum and minimum values of each
time step or simulation. The Position of the legend can also be changed. The Interpolation
type can also be changed to Linear or Log.
The Values and Colors of the legend can also be edited. The Numeric format can be set to
Scientific, Fixed, or Auto. There are also fields for entering the Numeric precision and
Number of levels for the colors. The Reverse button reverses the legend values assigned to
the contour bands while Interpolate allows you to interpolate the colors in between the two
colors that you select. After clicking Interpolate, use the legend within this dialog to select a
96 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

color to interpolate from and a color to interpolate to. When you select Interpolate, the
program displays contour colors for each frame based on the linearly interpolated values
between the zero value in the undeformed shape and the solver reported values. You can also
click on the number next to the color band and enter a new value for the color band.
There are also options for entering the legend header and footer information, including text, font,
font size, and font style. You can also save the changes you made to the legend by selecting
Save. This will save a .tcl file with all the legend settings so that these settings can be applied
to another HyperView session. The .tcl file is applied to a new session by selecting Import and
locating the .tcl file. You can also set a default legend .tcl file within the preference file. Please
refer to the Online Help for additional information.

Result display control

The set of options under Result display control allow you to manage the result display.
The first option, Overlay result display, allows contour, tensor, and vector results to be
overlaid in the same window when it is activated.
Clear Contour clears the contour and returns the model to its original state.
Create Plot Style allows you to create a contour plot style (based on the settings currently
applied to the model). This option will be further discussed in the section on the Results
Browser.

Show IsoValue toggles on/off the display of the Iso values.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 97


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Projection Rule

The Projection Rule allows you to select the primary and secondary axes used in the
projection to another coordinate system. These axes can either be from the global system or
from a user defined system that is specified in the Resolved in field.
For shell (or planar) elements, results in any 3D coordinate system can be projected onto the
element plane. For averaged nodal results, the projection plane is called the nodal projection
plane, which is the average of all element planes at that node.
In a projected coordinate system in HyperView, the local x and y axes will always lie on the
projected plane and local z-axis will be perpendicular to the plane.
The Projection Rule defines how the local x axis is obtained. Since the local z axis is always
known (from the normal direction of the plane), the y axis is obtained by the cross product of
local z and local x.
In order to have a projected coordinate system, you must pick a 3D reference coordinate
system from the resolved in pull down menu.
This reference coordinate system can either be a global or a user-defined system. Then, the
Primary axis (of the reference coordinate system) will be projected on the element plane to
obtain the local x axis. If the Primary axis is perpendicular to the element plane, the Secondary
axis will be projected to obtain the local x axis.
You have the option to pick the Primary and Secondary axis from the Projection Rule dialog.
For example if you are projecting the YZ plane, the Primary axis is the Y axis and the
Secondary axis is the Z axis.

98 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Query Results…

The Query Results… button opens the Query panel where you can view and export properties
and other information related to nodes, elements, components, and systems contained in the
active model.

Apply

When you are finished making all your selections, create a contour plot by clicking Apply in the
lower middle section of the panel.

Cache
After a contour is applied, you can click Cache to add this result to an internal cache.

/
This can be used to cache all of the results that are likely to be viewed multiple times in a given
session, thereby avoiding re-computation and allowing you faster switching between scalar
results.
The Cache/Delete Cache button (located in the lower middle section of the Contour panel) will
be disabled whenever the panel shows information that does not match the currently contoured
result. You must apply a particular contour result which matches the information on the panel in
order for the button to be enabled.
Note: This feature is only available for scalar results (and for scalar components of vectors and
tensors).

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 99


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Cached results are identified internally based on a unique identifier. This unique identifier
(checksum) is based on the following parameters below:
• Data type
• Data component
• Layer
• Corner data
• Result system
• Averaging method
• Envelope trace plot
• Value filter
• Layer filter
• Tracking system
• User defined system
• Projection rules
• Selection set
HyperView will automatically re-compute the data whenever any of the above parameters are
changed.

Creating Cached Results


Only the currently active contoured result may be added to the internal cache (using one of
the following methods):
• From the Contour panel, click Cache.
• From the graphics area context menu, right-click and select Create > Cached Result >
Contour.
• From the browser white space context menu, right-click and select Create > Cached
Result > Contour.
Note: Whenever a result is cached, it is computed for each frame the first time a frame is
loaded, thereby making the time taken for the first time load greater. The times for all
subsequent loads will be significantly reduced

100 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Applying Cached Results


All created cached results are displayed in the Results browser as a flat list in a separate folder
named Cached results.

The names listed in the browser are a combination of the data type and the component. When
there is more than one combination of the same data type and component (for example, with
different layers or averaging types), a number in parentheses will be added next to the name (as
shown in the example above).
Cached results can be applied or turned off by toggling their corresponding icons (located next
to each line item in the tree view).
• A bold icon next to a cached result indicates that it is currently applied.
• A dimmed icon next to a cached result represents that it is currently turned off/not applied.

You can quickly switch between (or apply) cached results by clicking on the data item icon in the
browser, or by right-clicking on the data item in the browser and selecting Plot > Contour.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 101


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Deleting Cached Results

The Cache button automatically changes to Delete cache whenever the result information
matches the currently contoured result and the result has been previously cached.
HyperView will hold the cached data until it is deleted (using one of the following methods):
• From the Contour panel, click Delete cache.
• From the browser data item context menu, right-click on the item and select Delete.
• To delete all of cached results simultaneously, right-click on the Cached results folder in
the browser and select Delete from the context menu.
Cached results are automatically deleted whenever the active subcase is changed or a currently
active derived subcase is modified, a new session is started, or a model is deleted.

See the Online Help >Caching Results topic for additional information.

1.2 - Post-processing Stress Results Using the Contour Panel


HyperView displays the following result data available in the result file:
 Centroid data - the centroid is the integration point or the available value that has
already been averaged by the solver (depending on the solver).
 Integration points or Nodes (depending on the solver) - these results are "element
bound", meaning that each is the contribution of the specific element to that node;
therefore it is the corner data of that element.

The Use corner data option in the Contour panel allows you to display color bands by
interpolating available corner results within each element. In addition, you can also use the
Averaging method drop-down menu to select the result coordinate system to be used to contour
the results.

102 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

 Use corner data - controls if centroidal values or corner data is used for the
visualization of values at an element.
 Averaging method - controls in which way this data (centroidal or corner data) is
visualized at the shared element nodes.

See the Online Help > Post-processing Stress Results Using the Contour Panel topic

for additional information.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 103


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

1.3 - Contour using Results Browser


Within the Results Browser there is the Result View. The Result view shows a
hierarchical view of available results for the current load case. The result types are grouped by
their type, and are broken up into Scalar, Vector, and Tensor folders. You can expand the
folder to see all of the details for each result type. For example, each of the Scalar, Tensor,
and Vector folders are expanded to see the Result Type within the folders.
By selecting one of those Result Types (for instance, Stress), the different Components are
shown:

To apply a contour plot using the Results Browser, simply click on the icon to the left of the
result to be used for the contour.

104 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

For example, in the plot below, the vonMises component for Stress is contoured.

The Layer selector allows you to quickly go through the various layers of the current result plots
(contour, tensor, or vector). This selector is located at the bottom of the browser, and is
available in the Result view only.

The Layer selector list is refreshed whenever a data type or the component of the data type is
selected in the tree.
You can change the current layer by clicking the up/down arrows on the Layer selector, or by
using the drop-down menu to select a layer from the layer list. A contour plot of the selected
result and layer will automatically be applied whenever the layer is changed. In the example
above with the component vonMises Stress contoured, the Layer is set to Max. Using the
same model as the image above, the Layer selector is changed to Min, so that the Min layer of
the vonMises stress is plotted:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 105


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Also within the Results Browser is a folder named Plot Styles. Plot Styles are a collection of
predefined settings for a contour, vector, or tensor plot.
For example, using the Contour panel, various aspects of a contour such as averaging method,
display options, and result type are set.

To create a Plot Style, the Contour panel is used to create a contour plot. Once the contour is
displayed in the Graphics Area, the Create Plot Styles… button can be selected:

This allows you to save settings that you use often.


For example, above the plot style Simple Averaging was created.
We can also create another plot style called My Defaults that specifies that no averaging
should be done.
Using the Result View in the Results Browser, the Current Plot Style can be set either using
the Quick Plot toolbar (shown below) or by right clicking on the plot style and selecting Make
Current.

106 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Once a contour plot style is selected as Current, the settings in that plot style will be used when
a result type is selected for contouring.
For example, the image below to the left uses the Default Contour plot style that is loaded into
each HyperWorks Desktop Session, while the image to the right uses the Simple Averaging
plot style that we previously created.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 107


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

2 - Tensor Plots
Tensor plots allow you to view the tensor plots of stress and strain directions and magnitudes
for various solvers from elemental values.
There are different ways to create tensor results in HyperView:

• Tensor icon on the Results toolbar


• Results > Plot > Tensor from the menu bar
• Results browser > Result View > Plot > Tensor

2.1 - Tensor icon & Results > Plot > Tensor from the menu bar.
Many of the options in the Tensor panel are similar to the Contour panel.

Working left to right within the panel, the first options are for the results being selected.

Result type

Select the result data type that should be used to display the tensor plot. Only tensor result type
data, indicated with a (t), are available for selection.
Layers
Create a tensor plot for a specified element layer when a layer definition is available for an
element. The settings will be applied to all layers defined in the model. If an element has no
layer definition, as with solids, the tensors are displayed regardless of layer selection. The
options that control how layers will be displayed are:
 Solver specific layer options - Solver dependent label(s). For example, Z1 and Z2
indicates the lower and upper layers of shells in a Nastran model.

 Layer Filter - Reduce the layer list available for the data types which have layers
(for example, plies in composite stress/stains or any vector result with layers).

108 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Use corner data


When corner data is available and Average at node is checked, the Use corner data option is
enabled. If the option is activated, corner data is used to calculate the tensor averaging to
nodes.

Selection

Before creating a tensor plot, you must pick one or more entities from the model. You can do
this by picking entities directly from the screen, using the quick window selection, or clicking
the Elements or Components input collector and using the extended entity selection menu.
See Selecting Entities Using the Input Collector for more information.

Resolved in

This drop-down menu allows you to select the result coordinate system that will be used to plot
the results. You can select the analysis, element, or global coordinate system as well as a
user-defined system. The System input collector is enabled when User System is selected.
 Global System (proj: none): Transforms to the global system.
(proj: none) indicates that no projection rule is selected for shells. When a projection
rule is selected (using the Projection Rule… button) it is displayed, for example, (proj:
y, x).
 Elemental System: Transforms results to the element coordinate system. In
HyperView, the element coordinate system is defined by element connectivity.
 Material System: Transforms to the material system. This option is only available when
the Result-Math template > Advanced is selected in the Load Model panel and a
solver input deck is loaded.
 Ply System: Transforms to the ply system. This option is only available when the
Result-Math template > Advanced template is selected in the Load Model panel and a
solver input deck is loaded.
 Analysis System: Displays the vector and tensor results as they are output from the
solver.
 User System: This option is available when the results file contains a user-defined
coordinate system. Click the System input collector to select a system by ID or pick from
the screen. (proj: none) indicates that no projection rule is selected for shells. When a

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 109


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

projection rule is selected (using the Projection Rule… button) it is displayed, for
example, (proj: y, x).
Average at node
Average at node averages elemental tensors to nodes. If no tensors are available at corners,
tensors from centroidals will be used. You can enable HyperView to use corner tensors by
checking User corner data. Since average tensor to node is required to transfer all the
tensors to a uniform system for accurate calculation, only the global system or one user-
defined system is allowed when Average at node is selected.
When averaging at nodes is activated for elemental results, the results for the nodes shared by
two or more components will not be averaged. HyperView assumes that different components
are defined with different properties or materials, therefore the elemental results are not
averaged across the component boundary.

Tensor format

Select the tensor format for the plot by selecting Principal or Component.

Show

Load or display any component of a tensor by checking the options:


If you select Principal - the P1(Major), P2(Mid), or P3(Minor) options are available.
If you select Component - the XX, YY, ZZ, XY, YZ, and ZX options are available.

110 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The shear components of a Strain tensor, XY, YZ, or ZX, are typically available from different
solvers in either the Engineering shear form or the Tensor shear form. The relationship
between the two forms is that Engineering shear form is twice that of Tensor shear form.
Whenever the strain tensor has to be transformed, or the principals and VonMises need to be
calculated, the shear components in Tensor shear form are applied. A HyperView tensor plot
always represents the shear components of the Strain in the Tensor shear format, in order to
represent a complete tensor. The Contour panel however, will show the shear components of
the strain tensor as they are output from the solver. Check the corresponding Solver
documentation to understand what form the shear strains are output.

Display options
 Size scaling - After you have applied tensor settings to a model, you can change the
tensor display by scaling the size of the tensor. The size scaling only applies to the
normal components (XX, YY, ZZ). Shear components are drawn inside, proportional to
the element size.
 By Magnitude - The tensor size is displayed relative to the value of the tensors.
Scale value allows you to increase or decrease the size according to a scaling
value.
 Normalized - The tensor is stretched or reduced according to the element size so
that the largest component fits in the element.

 Draw mode - After applying a tensor to the model, you can change the tensor drawing
mode to either of the following:
 Regular - Common data types like stresses and strains in the tensor format are
shown with arrows (default). Shear components are drawn as opposing arrows in
the plane in which they are acting. Shell element forces are recommended to be
drawn in this mode also.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 111


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

 Moment - Shell element moments are appropriate to draw in this mode.

 Color by - After you display tensors on a model, you can change the tensor color based
on either direction or value. To change a color, click the color box next to the direction to
display the color palette.
 Value - Applies colors based on values and the legend settings
 Direction - Changes the colors for the P1 (Major), P2 (Mid), or P3 (Minor)
directions. To change a color, click the color box to display the color palette. Select
a different color.

 Principal values - Displays the values of individual principals (P1, P2, P3) at the tips of
the arrows. This option is only available if the Tensor format is set to Principal.
 Normal values - Displays the values of individual normal components (XX, YY, ZZ).
This option is only available if the Tensor format is set to Component.
 Shear values - Displays the values of individual shear components (XY, YZ, ZX).
112 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

This option will only be active if the Tensor format is set to Component.
The displayed text for the components varies by the selected Draw mode:
Regular - XX, YY, ZZ, XY, etc.
Moment - Mx, My, Mz, Mxy, etc.

Legend threshold
 Max - Enter the value to be assigned to the highest color in the contour plot. Activate
the Max check box to apply the value.
The new value is also changed in the Values section of the Edit Legend dialog.
If a value entered for threshold Max is invalid, it will not be applied and the panel will be
updated to reflect the actual state.
 Min - Enter the value to be assigned to the lowest color in the contour plot. Activate the
Min check box to apply the value.
The new value is also changed in the Values section of the Edit Legend dialog.
If a value entered for threshold Min is invalid, it will not be applied and the panel will be
updated to reflect the actual state.
 Multiplier - Enter the multiplier for scaling all the result values

The other options in the panel (Edit Legend, Result display control, Projection Rule and
Query Results) all function the same way as the Contour panel. Please refer to Section 1 for
a detailed look at these options.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 113


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

2.2 - Tensor using Results Browser


Tensor plots can also be created using the Results Browser.

To create a tensor plot, simply right click in the Results Browser > Result View >Tensor folder
and select Plot>Tensor.

114 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Plot styles are applied in the same manner as with contour plots. Also, contour, tensor, and
vector plots can both be applied at the same time on the same model.
To clear any of the created plots, simply right click in the Results Browser > Result View,
select Clear Plot and then the plot type to clear.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 115


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

3 - Querying Results
The Query panel allows you to view and export properties, as well as other information, for
nodes, elements, components, and systems contained in the active model.

The Query panel can be accessed using the icon in the Results toolbar or by selecting
Results > Query from the menu bar.

To query entities in the active model: define a selection set using the input collector or by
picking entities directly on the model (the selected entities are highlighted in the graphics area),
check categories in the list, and click the Apply button.
The requested information is displayed in a table . The cells within the table are disabled and
cannot be changed. However, you can copy and paste highlighted cells into other programs
using CTRL + C and CTRL + V for copy and paste, respectively.
The input collector and the option list allow you to define the selection set to be queried:
 Input Collector - The input collector allows you to define a selection set for which you
would like to display information
 Option List - Below the input collector and on the left-most side of the panel is the
option list. You can activate the check box next to the information you would like
displayed in the table.

Below you can see the options available in the option list, these can change, depending on the
current input collector:
 Model Identifier - Displays the source of the data in the table. For instance, p1w1m1
means that the data comes from model 1, which is located on page 1 in window 1. This
option is for nodes or elements.
 Nodes - Node ID, Node Pool, Reference System, Analysis System, Node
Coordinates, Part ID, Part Pool, Part Name, Part Color, Original Data, Load Case,
and Simulation Step.

116 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The Contour (value) and Contour Resolved-In System options are available if a
contour has been applied to nodes or averaged to nodes.
The Vector (value) and Vector Resolved-In System options are available if a vector
plot has been generated at nodes.
The Tensor (value) and Tensor Resolved-In System options are available if a tensor
has been applied to nodes.
 Elements - Element ID, Element Pool, Element Config, Element Connectivity,
Element Normal, Element Centroid, Part ID, Part Pool, Part name, Part Color, Load
Case, and Simulation Step.
The Contour (value) and Contour Resolved-In System options are available if a
contour has been applied to elements for centroid or corner results.
The Tensor (value) and Tensor Resolved-In System options are available if a tensor
plot has been generated at the element centroid.
 Components - Part ID, Part Pool, Part name, Part Color, Load Case, and Simulation
Step.
Contour Min/Max, Min/Max ID, Max ID's Pool Name, Min ID's Pool Name, and
Contour Resolved-In System options are available if a contour has been applied.
Vector/Tensor Min/Max, Min/Max ID, and Resolved-In System options are available if
a vector or tensor plot has been generated.
 Systems - System ID, System Pool, System Type, Origin Coordinates, X axis, Y
axis, and Z axis.

Click the expansion button , to bring up the Query Fields dialog. This dialog lists all the
query options currently available (based on the current entity type that is displayed on the input
collector).

Query Fields dialog

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 117


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The entities can be selected by either graphically selecting them or using the extended entity
selector. The table is populated as each entity is selected.

Notice how additional options are available for querying the contour results
(Contour(Displacement) and Contour Resolved-in System).
For a full listing of the available properties in the query panel, please refer to the Online Help.
Query options can also be selected, or deselected, using the All/None/Reverse buttons:

All options listed are selected.

No options listed are selected.

Current selection status is reversed.

The following options allow you to generate, manage, and export query data.

Apply After you click Apply, the requested data is displayed in the table. The
number and content of the columns in the table depend on the fields
selected in the option list on the left side of the panel,
For example, if only the ID and Coordinates options are checked, then only
those two columns are displayed in the table.

Clear Table Clears all data in the table, but does not clear the selection set defined using
the input collector.

Export Click Export to display the Output File dialog, which allows you to save the
contents of the table to a text file. The initial directory displayed is the
present working directory, and the default file name "result" is provided. If
you want to open the file in Excel, save the file with a .csv extension.

Advanced… Click Advanced… to display the Advanced Query dialog. From this dialog
you can input additional query options.

This option will only be enabled if a contour plot has been applied
Note to the model.

In addition, you can access the following options by right-clicking anywhere within the table:

118 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Copy Copies all the data from the row(s) selected in the table to the clipboard.

Select

 All All rows in the table are selected and their corresponding entities
are highlighted in the graphics area.

 None No rows in the table are selected and their corresponding entities
are no longer highlighted in the graphics area.

 Reverse Current selection status is reversed.

Delete Deletes all rows that are selected in the table.

Once the model has a contour, vector, or tensor plot applied, you can also access the Query
panel directly from the Contour, Vector, or Tensor panel by clicking on the Query Results
button located on the right side of each panel:

Contour panel Vector panel Tensor panel

3.1 - Advanced Query


The Advanced Query dialog allows you to query components, elements, and nodes based on a
value in the legend of an applied contour. This allows you to filter your model to display entities
of interest for the contour that you have applied. You can also create groups of the data that
you have queried, thereby preventing the need to query the same data multiple times.
From the Query panel, click Advanced… to display the Advanced Query dialog. This option is
available after you apply a contour plot to your model. From the Advanced Query dialog, you
can input additional query options beyond what is available on the main Query panel.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 119


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Advanced Query dialog

Part bound results are also supported in Advanced Query. Using Result Math to create
expressions for part summations or max/min, the Advanced Query can be looped through the
entire model and all loadcases to find the Top N/Bottom N ranked parts.
The following options are available:

Use Use the file browser button to select a text file containing specific keywords.
config
For additional information on the Use config file option, please refer to the Online
file
Help.

User When using the User defined option, make selections from the following options:
defined

Apply to From the first drop-down menu, select All to apply the query to all entities.
Select Displayed to apply the query to only the displayed entities.
From the second drop-down menu, select the entity type on which you
want to query.
Possible entity types include Components and Elements if the data type
binding is elemental, or Components and Nodes if the data type binding
is nodal.

Value From the first drop-down menu, select a parameter from the list.

120 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

If the entity type is set to Components, the options include the following
operators:

• greater than or equal to, >=

• less than or equal, <=


If the entity type is set to Elements or Nodes, this include both, plus:

• Top N

• Bottom N
These two options allow you to display only a certain number of entities in
the table. For example, if you are querying elements, and the query
returns 1000 elements, then you can set the top 500 elements to be
reported in the table.
Enter a value in the text field next to the drop-down menu. This value can
be a real or decimal number if the operator is set to >= or <=. If the
operator is set to Top N or Bottom N, the value must be a positive
decimal number.

Warning When >= or <= is selected, the Warning threshold (1-99%) option
threshold becomes available. This option allows you to set a percentage between 1
(1-99%) and 99. When populating the table, the results that are greater or less
than the value specified are reported in red, while the results that fall
within the warning threshold and the value specified are reported in blue.
For example, in the image below, the results are queried for nodal values
that are greater than 4. These values are reported in the table in red. The
Warning threshold is set to 90%, meaning any result between the values
of 3.6 and 4 will be reported in the table as blue.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 121


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Loadcase Select Current Simulation, Current Loadcase, or All Loadcases. This


determines whether to apply the query to the current simulation step, or to
cycle through all simulation steps and possible all loadcases available.

Apply Click Apply to apply your settings and start the query. Visual feedback is provided
through a progress bar at the bottom of the dialog.
The acquired data is displayed in a table. Based on the entity type, the table consists
of different columns. Data can be sorted in the table by clicking on the header cells.
When clicking on a colored cell, the corresponding component/node/element is
displayed in the window.
After the acquired data is displayed in the table, contour plot information is displayed
in the status bar area.

Abort Click Abort to stop the search mid-query. This button is disabled unless a query is
being performed.

Export You can export data from the table to a .csv or HTML file. Click Export to display the
Export Options dialog.
For Report type, select CSV or HTML.
In the Author field, enter the author's name. The default value is the user name
assigned to your computer.
Enter comments or notes in the Description field.
Both the CSV and HTML formats contain the following information added to the
collected data as a header followed by the information available in the table:
See Exporting Advanced Query Data to an HTML File for more information.

122 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Close Click Close to close the dialog, clear the table contents, and return to the Query
panel. HyperView also restores the original display list that the model had upon
entering the Advanced Query dialog.

View Displays only the table and hides the upper part of the dialog.
Table
Only

Normal Click to return to the previous view.


View

Display The display options apply when you select a colored cell in the table to view
Options components.

Auto fit HyperView automatically fits the view after displaying the
component.

Mesh lines The component is displayed with the mesh mode on.

Mask Elements This option is only available when querying elements. Only
reported elements in the part/component are shown, all other
elements are masked.

Create Select this to create a set (group) of entities, which have been queried. Enter a name
Set in the Group Label dialog to create the set (group). A default label is provided. You
can also create a set (group) of entities using the Set panel.

Create Select this to create a measure. All reported nodes/elements are added to the
Measure measure. Enter a name in the Measure Label dialog to create the measure..

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 123


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

4 - Annotating Model Results


In this section, you will learn about:
 Notes panel - how to create notes to be displayed in the graphics area with the model,
also cover how to create multiple notes at once.
 Measures panel - how to measure the distance between nodes, position of coordinates,
relative displacement, relative angle, and angle between nodes.

4.1 - Notes
Animation files can be annotated using notes. Notes are text boxes placed in HyperView
windows for labeling items, describing trends, and relating additional information.
The Notes panel supports Templex functions, allowing you to perform calculations and other
data analysis within a note. The information in a note changes as a model animates.
There are different ways to create Notes in HyperView:

• Notes icon on the Annotations toolbar


• Annotations > Notes from the menu bar
• Results browser > Model View > Notes

Notes icon on the Annotations toolbar & Annotations > Notes from the menu bar

Notes
Notes are created by selecting Add in the Notes field. You can also Delete selected notes or
use the right click functionality in the Notes field to Delete, Rename, Show, or Hide selected
notes.

Attach to
Notes are attached to a Window, Entity, or Coordinates. When a note is attached to a
Window, the note can be dragged and placed anywhere in the window. When Coordinates
are selected, notes are placed in the graphics window based on the supplied X, Y, and Z
coordinates. The note cannot be dragged and placed elsewhere in the graphics window; it is
locked to the specified coordinates. The Entity option allows notes to be attached to Node,
Element, Component, or System. Notes are only attached to one entity at a time unless the
Multi select option is activated. When this option is selected, multiple nodes, elements,
coordinates, or systems can be selected. A note is created and attached to each individual
entity. Entity input collector allows you to select, or change, the entity type of a note.

124 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Field names
This drop-down menu allows you to select fields to be used in a Templex expression. The
available options change depending on the attachment type selected from the Attach to drop-
down menu, as well as the post-processing that has been applied. Each field name has a
Templex expression assigned to it. After selecting a field, click Insert Field to insert the field
name in the Description box. You can also enter a Templex expression directly into the
Description box. Please refer to the Online Help for a full listing and explanation of the Field
names and Templex functions.

Description
Once a note has been added to the Notes list, note text can be entered in the Description box.
Press ENTER to create a new line. There is no limit to the number of lines a note can contain.
Click the expansion button, , to enlarge the Description box.
Templex statements entered in the Description box are evaluated when you click Apply. If an
entity is referenced that is not available, it will be stated in the note. An if-then statement can be
used to remedy such a situation.

Display options
 Transparency can be activated,
 Move to entity moves the note location to where the entity is located
 Auto-hide will hide the note when the entity the note is attached to is not visible on the
screen. Anchor to screen option is used to have the note remain stationary during
animation or when manipulating the model view (rotating, zooming, etc.).
 There are also color, text alignment, and border options available.

Below is an example where the Multi select option is used:


 The model has been contoured with displacement and notes are required to indicate the
node ID and the contour value.
 First the note is Added and the Attached to field is set to Entity and the Multi select
option is activated.
 Then the 4 nodes are selected along the edges of the model.
 The Field names inserted are for Entity ID and Entity Contour Value.
 The color for all the notes is set to black and the Move to entity field is activated.
 Click on Apply.
 Below the Notes panel is shown after the notes have been created as well as an image
of the graphics area showing all the created notes.
Notice how Notes 2-5 have been created, but this was done in a single step.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 125


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Even though the notes were all created in a single step, once they are created they can be
edited individually.
For example, the bottom note is difficult to read so the Move to entity option is unselected.
This creates a line to the note indicating the attachment point.
Now the note can be dragged anywhere within the graphics area (as shown below).
The other display options are available for each individual note in this manner.

126 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

In the Notes panel, when the Multi select option is selected, there is the option to select
entities By Contour. This option is available within the Extended Entity Selection window (as
shown below).

This option is very useful when there are multiple regions which contain “hotspots” and a note is
desired at each location identifying the node id and contour value.
When you select By Contour, another window opens which allows you to select what in the
contour you are interested in.

There are many options available, but the Max of Window option allows you to draw a window
around the area of the local hotspot and identify the entity with the highest contour value.
You can also draw multiple windows and keep adding the maximum value found in the window
to the entities selected.
Below is an example where 2 windows were drawn around the hotspot on the left and right
sides of the model.
The two nodes found were added to the selection and a note was created at each location
specifying the node id and contour value:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 127


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

128 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Notes - Results browser > Model View > Notes


Notes can also be created using the Results Browser.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 129


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

To create a note, simply right click in the Results Browser > Model View and select Create >
Note.

You have several options you can set/change from the Results browser > Entity Editor,
already explained in the previous section.

130 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

4.2 - Measures
The Measure tool allows you to measure:
 Distance between nodes or systems (markers)
 Incremental distance between nodes or systems (markers)
 Position of x, y, z coordinates at any given time frame (nodes or systems/markers)
 Relative displacement of nodes or systems (markers)
 Relative angle between two nodes or systems (markers)
 Incremental angle between two nodes or systems (markers)
 Angle between three nodes or systems (markers)
 Yaw, pitch, and roll of systems (markers)
 Element or nodal results when contour data is applied
 Path between two (or more) nodes
Measures can also be defined on cross-section nodes for measuring position, distance
between, or any other nodal measure type to examine the points on the deformed section.
Calculating intrusion on a vehicle cross car section of the B-pillar is an example for automotive
crash simulations that will be applicable.
In addition, nodal results can be measured on cross-sections and paths defined to study the
variation of a result, as blank thickness from stamping simulations, using the path measures.
See the Cross-Section Measurements and Path Plots topic for additional details.

There are different ways to create Measure in HyperView:

• Measure icon on the Annotations toolbar


• Annotations > Measures from the menu bar
• Results browser > Model View > Measures

Measure icon on the Annotations toolbar & Annotations > Measures from the
menu bar.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 131


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

After creating a measure, you can use it to create a curve in a preview plot, a new plot, or an
existing plot. Cross plotting options to control the abscissa of the curve are also available.
Static MinMax Result - Displays the minimum and maximum values from all the time steps
combined.
Dynamic MinMax Result - Displays the minimum and maximum values at each time step

Example - Measure Group with a Bar Chart

Measure Groups List


Measure groups are displayed in the Measure Groups list and can be added and deleted using
the Add and Delete buttons.
Keyboard shortcuts are also available for selecting items within the list:
 Press the SHIFT or CTRL key on the keyboard + the left mouse button to select multiple
items from the list.
 Press the CTRL + A keys on the keyboard to select all items in the list.
 Press the DELETE key on the keyboard to delete the selected measure group(s).

In addition, you can access the following context menu options by right-clicking anywhere within
the Measure Groups list:

132 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Delete Deletes the selected measure group(s) from the list. .

Rename Displays the Rename dialog, which allows you to rename the selected measure
group.

Show Displays the selected measure group(s) in the graphics area and activates the
corresponding check box(s).

Hide Hides the selected measure group(s) in the graphics area and deactivates the
corresponding check box(s).

When a measure group is activated, it is included in the measure calculations and displayed on
the screen. For each relative displacement or relative angle, the time step at which the measure
was created is displayed as a reference. The definition of the currently selected measure group
is displayed in the definition window.
Measures can also be defined on cross-section nodes for measuring position, distance
between, or any other nodal measure type to examine the points on the deformed section.
Calculating intrusion on a vehicle cross car section of the B-pillar is an example for automotive
crash simulations that will be applicable. In addition, nodal results can be measured on cross-
sections and paths defined to study the variation of a result, as blank thickness from stamping
simulations, using the path measures. See online help for additional details.

Defining Measure Groups


Each measure type has various display options associated with it that can be activated using
the check boxes. ID (entity ID), Name (measure group name) and System (system ID).
The entities that will be used to perform a measure are selected using the Nodes, Elements,
Systems (or Markers) input collector.
Nodes or elements can be selected across different overlaid models.
The types of measures available are:

Distance Between The distance between two nodes or two systems (markers). The
options, Magnitude, X, Y, and Z, allow you to display the designated
value for each selected measure group.

Incremental The incremental distance between two nodes or two systems


Distance (markers). The incremental distance gives the relative change in
distance between two points. It is calculated by taking the distance
between two entities (at the current time step) and subtracting the

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 133


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

distance between (at the relevant frame, or time step, depending on the
animation mode as defined below). The change of length is displayed.

In transient animation mode, the incremental distance is relative to


the time step at which the measure is defined. The change in
distance between two points is tracked relative to the time at which
- the measure is defined.

In linear or modal animation mode dealing with real data, the


incremental distance always gives the change in distance between
- two points with respect to the undeformed configuration.

In modal animation mode with complex data, the incremental


distance is relative to the frame/angle at which the measure is
- defined.
The options, Magnitude, X, Y, and Z, allow you to display the
designated value for each selected measure group.

Position Available for nodes or systems (only). Provides x, y, and z coordinates


at any given time frame. The options, X, Y, and Z, allow you to display
the designated value for each selected measure group.

Relative The distance of a node at any given time relative to a position at the
Displacement time the measure item is defined. The options, Magnitude, X, Y, and Z,
allow you to display the designated value for each selected measure
group.

Relative Angle The angle between the new N1 N2 direction vs. the original N1 N2
direction defined at the time the measure is created (T1). The display
options are True angle, X-projection, Y-projection, and Z-projection.
The X-projection option displays the projected true angle onto the
plane, with the x-axis as the normal. The Y-projection and Z-
projection options act in a similar manner.

Angle Between The angle between three nodes (N1, N2, and N3) or three systems
(markers). Three nodes/markers are required to define the measure.
The display options are True angle, X-projection, Y-projection, and
Z-projection.

Incremental Angle The incremental angle between three nodes (N1, N2, and N3) or three
systems (markers). Three nodes/markers are required to define the
measure. The incremental angle gives the relative change in angle
formed by the three points. It is calculated by taking the included angle
of the three points (at the current time step) and subtracting the angle
between (at the relevant frame, or time step, depending on the mode of
animation as defined below). The change of angle is displayed.

134 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

In transient animation mode, the incremental angle is relative to the


time step at which the measure is defined. The change in angle is
- tracked relative to the time at which the measure is defined.

In linear or modal animation mode dealing with real data, the


incremental angle always gives the change in angle with respect to
- the undeformed configuration.

In modal animation mode with complex data, the incremental angle is


- relative to the frame/angle at which the measure is defined
The display options are True angle, X-projection, Y-projection, and
Z-projection.

Yaw Pitch Roll The angular rotational displacement of a system (marker) around the z-
axis, y-axis, and the x-axis is defined. The display options are Yaw,
Pitch, and Roll.

Nodal Contour or When a contour has been applied to the model, an additional measure
Elemental option is available. Nodal Contour is added if the contour contains
Contour nodal results; Elemental Contour is added if the contour contains
elemental results. For each of these measure types, you can display
the nodal or elemental values of the selected nodes or elements by
activating Value.
If the contour is based on a MaxLayer/MinLayer/ExtremeLayer, then
the Value displayed consists of two parts: a “Value =” display that
gives the actual value extracted across all layers that is a
Max/Min/Extreme respectively, and a “Layer=” display that provides the
layer name corresponding to the Max/Min/Extreme value. This is useful
in identifying the significant ply and its value at the same time. Any
curves generated from the Create Curves button will be plotting based
on the number associated with “Value=”.

Node Path Two or more nodes are required to define this measure. The nodes
located in the path between the selected nodes will be automatically
selected. You can continue to select nodes in the model to define a
path from which you would like to extract the contour results in order to
create a plot. The options, Value and Distance, allow you to display
the value and distance magnitude for nodes. Distance displays the
distance from the first node to each node along the path.
Nodes on a cross-section can be selected for defining a path along
the cross-sections. This is useful in measuring the variation of a
result, for example the blank thickness in stamping simulation, along
a section cut. There are however, certain restrictions on selection
and interchangeability of paths on regular model nodes to section cut
nodes. See the Cross-Section Measurements and Path Plots
topic for additional information.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 135


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Note about Nodal Contour or Elemental Contour


If the Multi select option is activated, then the Extended Entity Selection is available.

Multi select/ Allows you to select multiple entities which will be added to a measure
Add Items group. Activating this check box enables the Add Items button, and also
changes the entity collector from a single entity collector to an extended
entity collector.
After defining multiple entities, click on Add Items to add these entities
to the current measure group.
The Multi select option is only available for the following measure types:

• Position

• Relative Displacement

• Yaw Pitch Roll

• Nodal Contour

• Elemental Contour
Note - Multi-selection of the node collector only works on the nodes of
the model (the nodes on cross-section are not supported).

When Multi select is not activated, as each entity is selected, the measure is created and
displayed in the graphics window.

Entity input collector The input collector allows you to select, or change, the type of entity
that will be added to a measure group.

Also notice the options under the entity selector. These are the items that will be displayed in
the measure in the graphics area.

Use tracking Use tracking is available for all the measure types except Elemental/Nodal
Contour and Nodal Path. This option is enabled only if a tracking system has
been defined and activated from the Tracking panel. When Use tracking is
activated, the measure displays values relative to the tracking system.
This option is not available if you are using the Modal or Linear Static
animation mode.

136 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The order of the entities can be rearranged using the up and down arrows. Also, entities can be
removed from the measure group by selecting Delete.

Resolved in Allows you to transform your measure from the global system to a user selected
system. This option is turned off when the Use Tracking check box is activated.

Next are the Display Options for the measure group.

Display Options Allows you to control the display for all measure types.
Transparency Activate the Transparency check box to remove the
color from the measure group box and make it
transparent against the window.
Auto-hide Activate the Auto-hide check box to hide the measure
group box when the selected entities are not visible on
the screen.
Format Allows you to select either the Fixed or Scientific format
for the measure labels.
Precision Allows you to set the numeric precision from 1 to 10
decimal points.
Angle Allows you to select either Degrees or Radians as the
unit format used to display the angle.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 137


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The final option is the Create Curves option.

Create Curves Click to display the Create Curves dialog. This dialog allows you to create
curves from selected measures and place them on a plot:

Live Link The Live link option creates a link between the selections
made on the Measure panel and the curve. (Live) is added to
the name of the measure item and the curve name to indicate
that a live link is established. When a live measure item is
deleted, a message is displayed prompting you to keep or
delete the curve. When saving a report template with the live
link option enabled, the curve is reestablished from a newly
specified data file. The curve will be fully updated once a full
cycle of animation is completed. A curve that is linked to a
measure is updated when a tracking system is applied.

Single Activate this check box to enable the X-axis option (see
Curve description below). This option is only available for single entity
measures (Position, Relative Displacement,
Nodal/Elemental Contour, and Yaw Pitch Roll), and is
particularly useful for plotting path measures of discrete

138 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

selections.
Note - This option will automatically be activated for all Node
Path measures.

Clicking on the measure curves within the HyperGraph Coordinate Info panel will
highlight the entities in the HyperView graphics area.
In order for the highlighting to work, the curves must be Live linked and they should
also be created as either a Single Curve or from a Node Path. This is useful in
identifying the entities at min/max of the curves points (see the example below):

HyperGraph Coordinate Info Panel (with max curve point selected)

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 139


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

HyperView Graphics Area (with node highlighted on the model)

Use the Place on drop-down menu to select from on the following options:

Preview plot Allows you to review curves in a preview window.

New plot The curve is created in the next available empty


window. If no such window exists, then the page
layout is changed to the layout with an empty
window. If no empty window is found, then a new
page is added.

Existing plot The curve is created in an existing plot window


that was selected from the page and window tree.

Y-axis Select a component of a measure to define the Y-


axis in the plot. The available options depend on
the measure group type selected.

140 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

X-axis Select a component of a measure to define the X-


axis in the plot. The available options are:
Distance, Entity-X, Entity-Y, Entity-Z, or Entity
ID. With the X-axis option selected, the values of
the abscissa of the curve will be updated at every
time step for transient results, and at every frame
for modal results with complex data.
The default setting for this option is Distance.

Note: If you are using the Modal or Linear animation mode with non-complex data,
the value will remain constant throughout the period of animation.

OK Click OK to create a curve in a preview plot, a new


plot, or an existing plot in a HyperGraph window.

Cancel Click Cancel to disregard the settings and exit the


dialog.

Font
Click the Font button, , to display the Font Selector dialog.
This dialog allows you to select the font type, font style, and font
size.

Color Click the Color box to select a measure color from the pop-up
dialog.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 141


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Below is an example where the measure group that was previously created for the 4 nodal
contour values are plotted.
The Create Curves window below shows that the Y Axis is set to Value (which plots the nodal
contour value) and the Place on option is set to New Plot.

Notice in the image below, that all four nodes are selected in the Measure Items list.
This then creates a curve for each item in the second window.
Also, notice how each curve is a straight line.
This is because this data is from a linear analysis.

142 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Node Path
Another option for the Measure Type is Node Path. This option requires that 2 or more nodes
are selected.
The nodes located in the path between the selected nodes will be automatically selected.
You can continue to select nodes in the model to define a path from which you would like to
extract the contour results in order to create a plot.
The options, Value and Distance, allow you to display the value and distance magnitude for
nodes. Distance displays the distance from the first node to each node along the path (as
shown below).

Next, the curves can be created.


Below is an example where the Y Axis is set to Value (the contour value) and the X Axis is
either set to Distance (left) or Entity Z (right).
Notice how the y values in each plot are the same, they are just located at different X points,
depending on whether Distance or Value is plotted.

Next, the Entity ID option for the X Axis is selected.


This option is shown below in two different ways.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 143
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The left side shows an XY plot using Entity ID while the right side shows it with a bar chart.
To use Entity ID with a bar chart, you must first create the window with either an empty or
existing bar chart.
When creating the curve, select Existing Plot and select the appropriate window.

The Entity ID option is useful when reporting values at a node or element location. Using the
Live Link option, values can be easily compared on a bar chart.
This will be covered during the exercise.

144 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Measures - Results browser > Model View > Measures


Measures can also be created using the Results Browser.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 145


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

To create a measure, simply right click in the Results Browser > Model View and select
Create > Measure.

You have several options you can set/change from the Results browser > Entity Editor,
already explained in the previous section.

146 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

5 – HyperWorks Results Math


Introduction
The HyperWorks Result Math module is a result manipulation library that enables user-defined
data types to be added to a result, and transitions complex data manipulation tasks from
HyperView to a reusable, modifiable set of libraries that focus solely on result processing tasks:
 Reusable - Result Math module is used by HyperGraph, HyperView, and HVTrans.
Time consuming result manipulation tasks can be performed in batch using HVTrans
and saved in H3D. HyperGraph can load user-defined data types independent of
HyperView.
 Modifiable - The Result Math module operator libraries can be added to or replaced
with simple configuration file changes. Network installations can be modified by
redirecting to a local configuration file, enabling a user to add, replace, or remove
operator libraries.
This flexible design enables new features to be added or updated without disrupting the
HyperWorks applications that use it.

Features
The Result Math supports user-defined data type creation on results attached to a HyperWorks
application, and includes the following features:
 A flexible XML syntax for describing resources, expressions, tables, and user-defined
data types. Resources can be added beyond basic model and results including external
files (including additional FEA input decks, solver result files, and XML ASCII files) for
inclusion in data manipulation operations. The expression syntax allows reuse of
common operations and can be called from multiple user-defined data types or from
other expressions. A flexible table retrieval system allows access to model and result
data spanning simulation, subcase, and file boundaries.
 Model data capture supports material and property entities, as well as attributes bound
to any entity supported by the Result Math. All captured attributes are accessible as
result values, and can be used in operations.
 Enables batch-mode processing when loading an XML into HVTrans.
 A GUI that uses a simple Templex-like syntax that generates XML statements that can
be attached to a model/result pair on-the-fly. The GUI supports the addition of external
resources, enables easy access to user-defined expressions, and provides usage help
within a single dialog without having to ever see an XML statement.
 A high level of customization through configuration files, user-defined expressions, both
compiled and interpreted plug-ins, and seamless integration into HyperView through
Result Math Template files.

Exclusions
Result Math currently supports only FEA models and results – MBD results are unsupported,
as well as flex body FEA results within an MBD analysis. Adaptive model output from LS-Dyna
is unsupported at this time.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 147
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

5.1 - Result Math Templates


Whenever a model/result pair is loaded into HyperView, a Standard result math template file is
also loaded by default.
You can, however, disable the Result Math module or select a template file that suits a
particular vertical (NVH for example) using the Result Math template drop-down menu (located
in the Load Model panel).

Load Model panel - Result-Math template option

The Standard result math template will not add any new data types or expressions, and it will
also not instrument any model tables.
Other result math templates may add new expressions and/or data types to the model/result, as
well as access to model tables.
New templates can be added to the result math template drop-down menu by adding a
*RegisterResultMathTemplate command in the preference file.
A Result Math template file follows the same basic syntax as that of a normal XML file, with the
exception that two variables will be added to receive the contents of the Load Model panel:
• @HV_MODEL - is replaced with the selected model file.
• @HV_RESULT - is replaced with the selected result file.
These two variables can be used with resource XML commands as follows:
<resource id="model" path="@HV_MODEL" tables="preload” />
<resource id="result" path="@HV_RESULT" />

If you have a working Result Module XML command file, the only change necessary to convert
it into a template is to update model and result resources to use the @HV_MODEL and
@HV_RESULT variables.

148 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

5.2 - HyperView Expression Builder


The Expression Builder is a graphical user interface which allows user-defined data type
expressions to be authored directly within HyperView.
These expressions use a simplified Templex-style syntax that gets parsed into XML statements
which are then passed on to Result Math for processing.
To access the Derived Results Expression Builder you can do one of the following:

 Select the Derived Results button, on the Results toolbar


 Right click in the Results Browser or Graphics Area and select Create > Derived
Result from the context menu
The label will become the data type name, and must be unique for the analysis. The output can
be defined for all load cases, or restricted to the current one.
The expression text is made up of operators and table arguments, and validation occurs when
Apply or OK is clicked (invalid expressions will not be processed).
The expression text is parsed into the equivalent XML form and is passed on to Result Math.
The user-defined data type is then added to the subcase and is made available for selection in
any of the post processing panels within HyperView.
Only when the user-defined data type is selected for reading by a HyperWorks application will it
be processed by Result Math.
The Expression Builder dialog is divided in three general areas:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 149


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Output parameters
The label defines the user-defined data type name that will appear when selecting results from
the results browser or from the post processing panels. The data type output can be restricted
to the current load case only, however by default it is set to include all load cases.
Within the Output parameters area, the Label field is used to enter a name for the new derived
result. This name will appear in the Results Browser in the appropriate Scalar, Tensor, or
Vector folder. The Output can be defined for all load cases, or restricted to the current one.

Operator and Table selection


This section defines what tables and what operations on those tables will be added to the
expression text.
 Operators - The list of available operators is controlled by the template file selected
when loading a model and result, and it can be modified by adding or removing <using
/> statements in the template. The operator list is broken down by library, and when
selected, will update the help section with a description and the argument list.
The list of operator libraries available in the analysis is controlled by the result math
template in the file load reader options panel (see Configuration).
Double-clicking an operator will add it to the expression text area where the table
parameter arguments must then be selected in the table selection area. If an argument
has a default value, it will be entered into the expression text area, all other arguments
must be specified by selecting tables and entering them in the appropriate argument.

Additional information regarding the various operators (description, syntax, arguments,


etc.) can be displayed by clicking the Show operator help drop-down arrow.

150 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

 Table Selection - Once an operator is selected, tables must be selected to form the
input. The table selection portion of the dialog lists all of the tables available, and
optionally extended selection drop-downs to enable a table to be addressed from
another frame, load case, or even from a different resource. Click on the Show all
drop-down arrow to display the full list of table options.

Expression Text
Finally the Expression Text is entered.
 Expression Text - Contains the Templex-style statements made up of operators and
table arguments.
This is the actual expression to be evaluated for the new data type. Operators and
Tables are inserted and added to this field, as well as additional text to complete the
expression.

Default Arguments
Operators are designed such that they must be passed to all of the necessary tables and
arguments in order to function.
They are stateless and have no access to the tables in the model, or result, or the relationship
between.
This design maximizes their maintainability and flexibility and enables them to operate on any
valid input, with the only restriction being that the arguments fulfill the requirements of the
operator.
The side effect of this design is that argument lists can be lengthy.
In order to mitigate this, Operators and the Expression Builder populate as many arguments
with default values as possible.
When an operator is inserted into the expression, the defaulted argument list is hidden:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 151


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

For additional information on the Expression Builder, please refer to the Online Help.

152 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

5.3 - Result Math & HyperView Results Browser


Once a data type has been successfully created, it is added to the attached result.
The Results Browser, as well as each post-processing panel, will reflect the updated result:

The Result Browser supports addition and modification of user-defined data types via the
context menu (which will be the primary method for invoking the Expression Builder dialog).

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 153


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

6 - Derived Load Cases


In this section, you will learn how to use the Derived Load Case tool to create derived load
cases.
The Derived Load Case utility allows you to create a derived load case from other load cases,
or from a combination of other load cases and simulation steps.
To access the Create/Edit Derived Load Case dialog:

 Derived Load Steps on the Results toolbar,


 Create > Derived Load Steps from the Results menu bar.
 Results browser or graphics area > Create > Derived Load Case > …

The types of derived load cases that can be created are Steps, Linear-Superposition and
Envelope.

The type is set in the Create/Edit Derived Load Case dialog from the Type drop-down menu.

154 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

6.1 - Steps
When the Type is set to Steps, this allows you to create a derived loadstep from other
loadsteps.
A derived loadstep can contain more than one simulation step, with scale factors optionally
applied to them.
You can select simulation steps from the derived loadstep list by selecting them with your
mouse or the arrow keys.

Use the and buttons, to add or remove the required loadsteps/simulations to the
derived loadstep.
From the Derived Load Case: drop-down menu, you can select the derived loadstep that you
would like to be active.

Upon selecting a derived loadstep, the simulation steps contained within that derived loadstep
are displayed in the table below the drop-down menu.

Below is an example where Subcase 1, Subcase 2, and Subcase 3 have been added to the
Derived load case named Deriv_1. Notice that the Type is set to Steps:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 155


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

6.2 - Linear-Superposition
The Linear-Superposition type is used to create a derived loadstep with only one simulation
step, which is a linear combination of all the selected loadsteps/simulations with scale factors.
Once the Type is set to Linear-Superposition and the desired loadsteps are selected, a scale
factor can be applied to each loadstep.
The Loadsteps section lists all the loaded results files in the current session, as well as all the
loadsteps/simulations corresponding to each result file, in a tree-like structure.
In addition, the derived load cases list can be displayed by clicking on the View Derived Load
Cases icon .

This section allows you to specify which loadstep(s), from the currently selected input file, to add
to the linear combination definition. You can select items from the list by selecting them with
your mouse or the arrow keys. Multiple loadsteps from the tree structure can be selected using
the CTRL and SHIFT keys.

Use the and buttons, to add or remove the required loadsteps/simulations to or from
the derived loadstep.
Below is an example where three loadsteps are selected and each have a different scale factor
applied:

156 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

6.3 - Envelope
The last type is the Envelope option. This option allows you to create a derived loadstep with
only one simulation step, which compares entity values and stores desired values from selected
loadsteps (or animations) based on the Min/Max/Extreme/Range option that is chosen.
The Envelope type is used to identify the most significant loading conditions out of all the
selected analysis loadsteps. The created loadstep is a summary of all the selected loadsteps
which meet the specified criteria (Min/Max/Extreme/Range).

When Min is selected, the minimum values among all the selected loadsteps or simulations are
found.
Max finds the maximum values amoung all selected loadsteps or simulations.
The Extreme option finds the maximum absolute value among all the selected loadsteps or
simulations.
The Loadsteps section lists all the loaded results files in the current session, as well as all the
loadsteps/simulations corresponding to each result file, in a tree-like structure.
You can select simulation steps from the derived loadstep list by selecting them with your
mouse or the arrow keys.

Use the and buttons, to add or remove the required loadsteps/simulations to the
derived loadstep.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 157


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Below an Envelope derived loadcase is created which searches for the maximum value in
Subcase 1 and Subcase 2.

Within the Create/Edit Derived Load Case dialog, there is the View Derived Load Cases
button, . This button changes the tree listing the available loadcases so that the derived
load cases are listed (as shown below):

158 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

6.4 - Derived Load Cases & HyperView Results Browser


Once the derived load case has been created, it is now available for selection in the Results
Browser:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 159


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Exercise 3a - Post Processing a Strength Analysis


This exercise uses the file, bullet.op2 as the model and result file.

Step 1: Load the bullet.op2 file.


1. Load the …\Model-files\3a-bullet\bullet.op2 as the model and result file.

Step 2: Use the Results Browser and Contour panel to create contour plots.
1. In the Results Browser, review the subcases that are available:

Notice that there are 3 subcases available.


2. Set the subcase to SUBCASE 1 = st_down.
3. Within the Results Browser, expand the Results > Tensor > Stress folders.
4. Click the icon to the left of vonMises to contour the model with vonMises stresses.

160 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

5. Enter the Contour panel by selecting in the Results toolbar.


Notice how the Result type is set to vonMises Stress.
6. Set the Averaging method to Simple and then click Apply.

7. Next click Create Plot Style… to create a new plot style.


8. Enter vonMises Simple Stress as the New plot style and click OK.

9. Within the Results Browser, expand the Plot Styles folder.


10. Click the icon next to Default Contour.
Notice how the contour is now changed to a contour of displacements.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 161


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

11. Next, click the icon next to vonMises Simple Stress in the Plot Styles folder.
This applies the contour of vonMises Stress with Simple Averaging. These were the
settings that were saved to the Plot Style.

Step 3: Use the Results Browser and Tensor panel to create a tensor plot.
1. While in the Results Browser, in the Results > Tensor folder, click on the icon to the left of
Stress.
This overlays a tensor plot in the graphics window.

162 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

2. Next, enter the Tensor panel by clicking in the Results toolbar.


3. Within the panel, under Color by, select Direction to change how the tensors are being
colored.

4. To clear the tensor plot in the graphics window, right click in the Results Browser and
select Clear Plot > Tensor.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 163


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Step 4: Use the Query panel and Advanced Query function to investigate the
stress results.

1. Enter the Query panel by clicking on the Query icon in the Results toolbar.
Notice that the entity selector is set to Nodes. This is because the current contour plot is a
stress plot which has been averaged so that the results are located at the nodes.
2. Make sure that Node ID, Node Coordinates, and Contour (Stress) are selected below the
Nodes selector.
This is the information that the table will be populated with once the nodes are selected.
3. Graphically select a few nodes in the model.
Notice how the table is populated after each node is selected. Also notice how the selected
nodes are highlighted in the graphics area.

4. Click on Advanced… to open the Advanced Query window.

5. Set the Apply to options to All and Nodes.


6. For Value, select >= and enter a value of 14000.
7. Check the box for Warning threshold (1-99%) and enter a value of 85.

164 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

When the Warning threshold is activated, the Advanced Query will not only report the
nodes that are greater than or equal to 14000, but also those that are within 85% of 14000.
8. Set the Loadcase to the Current Simulation.
9. Click Apply.

Several nodes are reported in the table.


10. Scroll through the table to view the results from the Advanced Query. Click on Value to
sort the results be ascending and descending order.
11. Change the Warning threshold from to 95 and then click Apply.

Less nodes are now reported in the table.


HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 165
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

12. Left click on the reported values in the table and notice how the Node ID and reported
Value are highlighted in the graphics area.

13. Click Close to close the table.


14. Within the Results Browser, right click on Components and select Show.

Step 5: Use the Results Browser to create a Linear Superposition Derived


Loadcase.

1. Within the Results Browser, select the Load Case View, .


2. Right click in the Load Cases and select Expand All.
3. Using the Ctrl and the left mouse button, select Simulation 1 within each Subcase as
shown below:

166 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

4. Right click on Simulation 1 and select Create > Derived Load Case > Linear-
Superposition.
5. Right click in the Results Browser and select Expand All again.
This expands the Derived Load Cases folder.

6. Under Linear-Superposition, scale factors can be added for each subcase simulation (you
may have to expand the Results Browser to the right to see the Linear-Superposition
column). Right click on each value and set the following scale factors:
SUBCASE 1 2.0
SUBCASE 2 -1.2
SUBCASE 3 0.8

7. Right click on Derived Load Case 4 and select Make Current.

8. Right click on SUBCASE 1 and select Make Current.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 167


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Step 6: Turn off the 1D elements and create notes at the local hotspots.

1. Within the Results Browser, select the Model View and then expand the Sets folder.
2. Right click on 1D Set and select Hide.

3. From the Annotations toolbar, select the Notes panel.


4. Click Add to create a new note.
5. For Attach to, select Entity.
6. Check the box for Multi select.
7. Click on Nodes and select By Contour.
8. From the drop down, select Max of Window (as shown below).

9. In the graphics area, zoom into the area of the hole and draw a window around the nodes
located just below the hole (as shown below).

10. Click Add.

168 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Within the Extended Entity Selection – By Contour window, it now says 1 entities
selected (or more, it depends on the selection window).
11. Draw another window around the nodes above the hole and select Add.
The Extended Entity Selection – By Contour window now says 2 entities selected.
12. Click Return.
13. In the Description Field, delete what is currently there and add Node ID:
14. From the Field names drop down, select Entity ID and click Insert Field.
15. Press Enter within the Description field to start a new line and then add Stress Value:
16. From the Field names drop down, select Entity contour value and click Insert Field.

17. Click Apply to create the notes.

Remember, the values in the notes are the maximum contour values found within the
window drawn. Because the window you drew is unique, you may have different results
than what is shown above.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 169


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Step 7 (OPTIONAL): Redo Step 1 to 6 using Results browser + Entity Editor to


create Contour, Tensor, Notes.

1. Go to the Results Browser > Result View … to create Contour and Tensor.

2. Go to the Results Browser > Model View … to create/edit Notes.

170 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Exercise 3b - Using Result Math for a Strength Analysis


This exercise uses the files bullet.fem and bullet.op2 as the model and result file.

Step 1: Load the bullet.fem and bullet.op2 file and set the Result-Math
template.
1. Set the Load model file to …\Model-files\3a-bullet\bullet.fem.
2. Set the Load results file to …\Model-files\3a-bullet \bullet.op2.
3. For Result-Math template, select Advanced.
4. Click Apply to import the model and result file and also set the Result-Math template.

Step 2: Use the Results Browser and Contour panel to create contour plots.
1. In the Results Browser, set the subcase to SUBCASE 2 = st_up.

2. Within the Results Browser, select the Results View .


3. Expand the Tensor > Stress folders.
4. Click the icon to the left of vonMises to contour the model with vonMises stresses.
5. Click on vonMises and from the bottom of the Results View, click on Max and select Min.

This sets the Entity with layers in the Contour panel to Min. Notice how the contour is
changed automatically.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 171


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

6. Click on Min and select Z1.

Step 3: Use the Measure panel to create a Measure Group.

1. From the Annotations toolbar, select the Measures panel .

2. Click Add under Measure Groups to create a new Measure Group.


172 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

3. From the drop down, select Elemental Contour.


Because the stress values are being shown without any averaging, the results are element
based.
4. Select 3 elements in the model as shown in the image below.
Notice that as you select each element, the Element ID and contour value are displayed.

5. Under Display Options, uncheck the box for Transparency.


This displays each measure with a colored background (depending on background setting).

6. Set the Format to Scientific and the Precision to 1.


Notice how the format of the number is changed.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 173


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

7. Check the box for Transparency.

Step 4: Use the Results Browser to calculate the normalized vonMises stress.
1. Within the Results Browser, right click on vonMises and select Create > Derived Result.
This launches the Expression Builder.
2. Within the Expression Builder, in the Label field, enter NormalizedStress.
3. Notice how the Table and Table component are automatically set to Stress and
vonMises. Click Insert to add this value to the Expression field.
This enters T2.C7 into the Expression field. This is the internal reference to the vonMises
stress.

174 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

4. After T2.C7 add a / within the Expression field.


In order to calculate the normalized stress, we are going to take the vonMises stress at each
element and divide it by the material yield value.
5. Click on Add resource: and select the bullet_yield.xml file.

This file contains a table with the material yield values.


6. From the Library: dropdown menu, select Model.
These are additional operators that have been added by setting the Result-Math template
to Advanced. These Model Operators allow you to convert values from a part or material
based value to an element value (and vice versa).

7. Click on the operator BCMatToElem.


This populates the operator help with the help information. This operator assigns values
that are bound to materials to the associated elements.
8. Double click on BCMatToElem to add this operator to the Expression.
9. Place the cursor between the parentheses within BCMatToElem() in the Expression.
10. From the Table dropdown, scroll to the bottom of the available Table listings and select
Yield.
This contains the information that is in the bullet_yield.xml file.
11. Click Insert to add this value into the Expression.

12. Uncheck the Display alias option.


This changes the display of the expression in the Expression field so that the full name of
the components are used and not the internal references.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 175
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

13. Click OK
14. Within the Results Browser, expand the Scalar folder and notice that NormalizedStress is
listed under the Scalar folder.

HyperView automatically sorts the new derived result into the correct Scalar, Tensor, or
Vector folder.
15. Click the icon to the left of NormalizedStress to contour the model with the derived result.
Notice how the values in the Measure Group are updated as well. Also notice how the
NormalizedStress value is very close to 1. This helps to indicate which elements have
exceeded the yield stress (values over 1 indicate the elements have exceeded the yield
stress for the material).

176 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Step 5 (OPTIONAL): Redo Step 1 to 4 using Results browser + Entity Editor to


create Derived Results, Tensor, Notes.

1. Go to the Results Browser > Result View … to create Contour.

2. Go to the Results Browser > Model View … to create/edit Measures.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 177


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

3. Go to the Results Browser > Result View … to create/edit Derived Result.

178 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

7 - Free Body Diagrams (FBD)


.
7.1 – FBD Overview
You can create or edit Free Body Diagrams (FBD) using the FBD utility that is provided in
HyperView. The Free Body Diagram (FBD) utility facilitates the extraction and post-processing
of Grid Point Force (GPFORCE) results. FBD extractions are typically utilized for breakout
and/or sub-modeling analysis schemes, where balanced "free body" sub-cases are extracted
from a coarse grid model and applied to a fine grid sub-model for eventual optimization and/or
analysis. FBD is also used to extract section resultant forces and moments (typically at the
centroid of a section) for use in traditional strength calculations.

7.2 - FBD Utility


The FBD utility extracts grid point force (GPFORCE) data (including forces and moments) for a
user-defined element set, and is useful for doing breakout modeling within a sub-modeling
scheme. Results can be output for graphical review, a text summary table, and/or a formatted
Comma-Separated Values (.csv) file which can be loaded into traditional spreadsheet software
packages.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 179


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The data from the currently loaded model/results file and the selected load case/simulation in
the Results browser will be used for all grid point force based calculations. The FBD utility
currently supports Ansys (Rst), Nastran (Op2), and Optistruct (XDB) result files.

Important Note: The Advanced Result Math template must be selected when loading the
model and result files in the Load Model panel.

The FBD utility is displayed in the tab area, which opens when you activate that tool by clicking

the FBD icon on the Results toolbar.

180 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

The FBD Forces utility is broken down into three major sections, each of which corresponds
with the process order of using the tool:

Click the following buttons located at the bottom of the tab to clear the current plot or close/exit
the dialog:
 Clear - Clears the current plot for the selected set in the graphics area. The dialog will
remain open
 Close - Closes/exits the dialog. All current plots will remain displayed in the graphics
area (until they are cleared using the Clear button).

FBD section definition


The FBD section definition portion of the tab allows you to create and manage the section
definitions that are used for plotting the free body or resultant forces. This section contains tools
for manually defining sections, which are defined by an element set, node set, summation node,
and a local result coordinate system.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 181


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

FBD plot
The FBD plot portion of the tab contains various options to review and display the results of
both Free Body Force and Moment and Resultant Force and Moment extractions.

Display controls
The Display controls portion of the tab contains sub-tabs which allow you to control the
presentation of the results/plot.

The following sub-tabs are available:


 Plot - The Plot sub-tab allows you to create a vector plot and turn on/off the display of
various attributes.

182 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

 Display - The Display tab allows you to change how the vectors are displayed for the
created plot.

 Summary - The Summary tab allows you to select load cases for display in a summary
table.

The load case list can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headers (Id and
Label).
Select the load case(s) to be included in the summary table by activating the check box
for the desired load case(s). Or click the check box in the column header to select all of

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 183


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

the available load cases.

Click the FBD summary table icon (located in the lower right corner of the tab) to
output the results to a pop-up dialog for instant review. The table contains information
about the load cases, element/node sections, and detailed data from the grid point
extraction at each node. A sample window with partial output is shown below:

The FBD summary table dialog displays a hierarchical view of the information
contained in the FDB tab, grouped together in a table by section and subcase.
The table can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headers (Section,
Subcase, Simulation, Load, System, Node, X, Y, Z, Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz, Fr,
Mr). The sorting method will depend on the type of table that is currently selected.

To select/change the table type, click the drop-down menu and select one of
the following options:
o Resultant table - The Resultant table displays the information grouped by
section/block.
o FBD table - The FBD table displays the information in a flat list (without any
grouping by section).
o Summary table - The Summary table only displays the information for the top level
summary rows.

This FBD summary table dialog also includes options that allow you to export the plot
as a .csv file (which can be loaded into traditional spreadsheet software packages) or
save it to an .fbd file (to be imported into HyperGraph).

184 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

To export/save the plot, click the Save as drop-down menu and select one of
the following options:
o Save as .csv - Creates or saves a .csv file containing the same information as the
summary table, but in a comma separated file. Use the Export CSV file dialog to
create a new file or select an existing file.

Note - If an existing file is selected, you will be asked if you wish to replace the
existing file.

o Save as .fbd - Creates or saves an .fbd file that can be read into HyperGraph. Use
the Export CSV file dialog to create a new file or select an existing file.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 185


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Note - If an existing file is selected, you will be asked if you wish to replace the existing
file.

Two utilities available within HyperGraph interact with data generated from the FBD
utility: Shear and Moment Plot (VMT Plots) and Potato Plot. These utilities are
accessed from the Free Body Diagrams item within the HyperGraph Utilities menu.

Example: Shear Moment Plot

186 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Example: Potato Plot

7.3 - FBD Solver Interfacing


The Free Body Diagram utility will behave differently depending on the solver that you interface
with in HyperView. Click below to learn more about each of the supported solvers:

Ansys
 Currently only supported for Win32 and Win64 platforms.
 Results are supported through the .rst output file.
 Grid Point Forces (GPF) results are requested with the following .rst file output requests:
o OUTRES,ALL,ALL
OR
o OUTRES,NSOL,ALL
o OUTRES,RSOL,ALL
 Displacement results are requested with the following .rst file output requests:
o OUTRES,ALL,ALL
OR
o OUTRES,NSOL,ALL
o OUTRES,RSOL,ALL

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 187


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 3: Strength Analysis

Nastran
 Results are supported through the .op2 output file.
 Grid Point Forces (GPF) results are requested with the GPFORCE .op2 output request.
 Displacement results are requested with the DISPLACEMENT .op2 output request.
 It is recommended practice to output data for only the node set(s) of interest. This
procedure reduces the size of the solver results file and helps speed up the FBD
extractions. Consider using STRESS=NONE and STRAIN=NONE to further reduce the
size of the results file.
 MPC forces and moments are properly extracted for the following MPC constraint types:
o RBE2, RBE3
o RigidLink
o RJOINT
o RROD
o RBAR

OptiStruct
 Results are supported through the .op2 output file.
 Grid Point Forces (GPF) results are requested with the GPFORCE .op2 output request.
 Displacement results are requested with the DISPLACEMENT .op2 output request.
 It is recommended practice to output data for only the node set(s) of interest. This
procedure reduces the size of the solver results file and helps speed up the FBD
extractions. Consider using STRESS=NONE and STRAIN=NONE to further reduce the
size of the results file. You may consider using the NOMODEL option on the
OUTPUT,OP2 output format request.
 MPC forces and moments are properly extracted for the following MPC constraint types:
o RBE2, RBE3
o RigidLink
o RJOINT
o RROD
o RBAR

See the Online Help for additional information.

188 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Chapter 4

Plotting Basics
1 - HyperGraph 2D Introduction
This chapter will cover the basics of plotting in HyperWorks Desktop using HyperGraph 2D:
 Plotting XY Data
 Evaluating Curve Data and Curve Referencing
 Changing Curve Display Attributes
 Curve Filtering
 Creating and Editing XY Plots

Powerful data analysis and plotting tool for all types of CAE data.
HyperGraph 2D is a powerful data analysis and plotting tool with interfaces to many popular
file formats. Its sophisticated math engine is capable of processing even the most complex
mathematical expressions. HyperGraph 2D combines these features with high-quality
presentation output and customization capabilities to create a complete data analysis system
for any organization.

While visualization of results is one phase of post-processing, another is the actual


comparison of test data with results obtained from solvers. Also, you may be interested in
plotting specific data types that you requested while solving a job to see how it changes with
respect to time or with other data types. HyperGraph 2D with its plotting capabilities provides
you the opportunity to not only compare and contrast, but also to plot and calculate data
from already existing data using built in functions or by creating your own. This chapter gives
a brief idea of how to use HyperGraph 2D to plot data, compare them with one another, use
filters and perform math operation on the plotted data.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 189


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Benefits
HyperGraph 2D supplies design, test, and analysis engineers with an intuitive plotting and
data analysis package. HyperGraph 2D’s combination of an easy-to-use interface and robust
suite of automation tools enables engineers to view and analyze data more efficiently, which:
 Minimizes the manual effort and time required to generate plots. The automatic
plot builder generates a family of fully labeled plots from data file(s), using file
header and channel information.
 Eliminates repetitive tasks. Plot macros capture and automate common math
expressions.
 Eliminates repetitive plot generation. Report templates can capture and automate
the building of entire pages of data plots.
 A fully customizable interface. Customize the interface and the tools to fit any
engineering environment.
 A customizable library of mathematical functions. You can add custom defined
math functions to Altair’s robust math library.
 Provides automation tools for efficient data analysis and report generation.
 Overlays sequential test and simulation results for visualization and analysis.
 Directly exports active session reports to HTML or PowerPoint XML.

Application Menu - HyperGraph 2D and Plot Types


The Plot capabilities are displayed when you select HyperGraph 2D from the application
menu.

190 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Custom Plot Types


Plots can be customized to be displayed as other plot types, such as Gauge, Pie, 3DBar and
more. Scripts have been included in HyperGraph 2D to display these custom plot
types. Two of these scripts contain context sensitive menus to activate the override option
for the plot window.
From an XY plot type, right-click in the plot window to display the context menu. In the Plot
window, using the Custom Rendering context menu option, select Gauge. The Gauge plot
type supports most XY features, such as Max/Min, Fixed or Scientific Notation, two Datum
Lines (Red and Yellow only), fonts and more. Some XY plot features are not
supported. This feature is designed for the first curve in a window only. See the example
images below.

From a bar chart, you can right-click in the plot window to display the context sensitive
menu. In the Bar Chart window, using the Custom Rendering context menu option, and
select Pie Chart. The Pie Chart plot type supports most bar chart features such as Datum
Lines, Fonts, syntax and more. Some bar chart features are not supported. This feature is
designed for a single catalog in a window. See the example image below.

These scripts can be found in the [installation


directory]/utility/scripts/plotting/overrides. These scripts can easily be modified to generate
other custom plot types.
To turn off the custom plot type, right-click in the Plot window or Bar Chart window, select
the Custom Rendering menu option and click None.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 191


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

2 - HyperGraph 2D – GUI

The HyperGraph 2D graphical user interface provides you with a consistent look and feel
when you are working in any of the HyperWorks Desktop applications.

192 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

2.1 - HyperGraph 2D – Browsers

The tab area is the portion of the graphical user interface that contains the browsers, utilities,
and other functionality not shown in the panel area. The tab area can be moved to either the
left or right side of the graphics area, or both, or it can be hidden completely.
Browsers that are displayed in the tab area by default in the framework include the Session
Browser and the Model Browser. Other browsers that can be displayed on or off via the
View menu are the Parameters Browser, the Process Manager, Library Manager, Solver
Browser, Connector Browser, Mask Browser, Entity State Browser, and the Utilities
Menu.

HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser


The HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser resides on a tab in the Tab Area sidebar and allows you
to view the HyperGraph 2D plot structure.
The Plot Browser tools allow you to search, display and edit entities and their properties
within the current session.
The plot structure is viewed as a flat, listed tree structure within the browser. However, if the
plot has a hierarchy, then the Plot Browser accommodates this hierarchical structure.
From the Plot Browser, you can select entities one at a time or several simultaneously
using common selection techniques.
You can also use the browser's context-sensitive menus to select entities.
Using the Plot Browser, you can perform many of the operations available in the
HyperGraph 2D panels, thus allowing you to modify your plot and curve properties in one
location.
Some of these operations include:
 Performing Single Curve Math and Multiple Curve Math operations
 Renaming curves
 Modifying or deleting curve properties, such as:

• Curve attributes
• Axes attributes
• Plot options
• Notes
• Datum lines
• Plot macros

The Plot Browser can be turned on or off using the View > Browsers > HyperGraph 2D >
Plot menu options.
A check mark indicates that the HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser is activated for display in the
Tab Area.
Note: The Plot Browser can also be positioned to appear on the right side of the page (the
right tab area).

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 193


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser with the Plot View Selected

194 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser with the Curve View Selected

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 195


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser - Views

Within the Plot Browser, there are seven predefined browser view modes (which are
accessed via the first row of icons within the Plot Browser). Selecting a predefined browser
view mode allows you to quickly filter specific entities in your plot.
Note: When any view is selected, the tree structure and Properties Table update
accordingly.

Plot Browser view modes

HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser - Filters


The following controls affect which entities are displayed in the Plot Browser.

Show Menu
When the Plot Browser is set to Plot View, the Show menu allows you to filter the plot
entities that appear in the browser's tree structure. This is only available when Plot View is
selected from the Plot Browser.

196 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Each plot entity in the menu has a checkbox next to it; click a checkbox to toggle the display
of that entity type as a folder in the browser’s tree structure. For example, the Legend folder
is only displayed in the tree structure if Legend is checked in the list. By using the Show
menu, you can make the tree structure shorter and easier to navigate by removing plot
entities from the Plot Browser tree that you do not need to work with.

Filter Area - Curves


When the Plot Browser is set to Curves View, you can filter on any curve property that
appears in the Plot Browser's tree structure. The Filter Area allows you to filter on any plot
entity property. This feature is only available when the Curve View is selected from the Plot
Browser.

To define a filter, right-click on any property name in the Properties Table and select Add
as filter from the context-sensitive menu. When selected, the filter for that property is
displayed in the Filter Area and you will be able to select the value by which to filter. After a
value is given for that filter, all vectors with that value for that property are shown in the Plot
Browser, along with their corresponding curves. This property will also be added to the list
of filterable properties in the default combo box shown in the image below.

At the top of the Plot Browser, click the button to display the combo box containing the
following options, along with any user-defined filters that have already been added from the
Properties Table:

To remove a filter, select it from the list in the Filter Area and click the button.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 197


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Lock Button, – Toggles the list display state in the Filter Area between locked and
unlocked. When the list is locked, the tree is not dynamically updated when an additional
filter is applied or when the underlying data changes. The inverse is true when the state is
set to "unlock".

Display Control Tools


The following buttons can be used to change the display state of various entities in the Plot
Browser tree. They are only available when Curve View is selected.

- Select All – Selects all entities shown in the tree.


- Select None – Clears all entity selections shown in the tree.
- Reverse Selection - Reverses the state of the items in the tree (displays the hidden and
hides the displayed).

HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser – Properties Table


When a plot entity is selected from the Plot Browser tree, its properties and values are
displayed in the Properties Table.
The image below shows the property information for a vector selected from the Plot Browser
tree:

Below is an example of the Table when a curve is selected from the Plot Browser tree.

198 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The table contains two columns:

From the Plot Browser tree, you can select multiple curves of different types (for example, an
XY curve and a bar chart), but only the properties that the curves have in common are
displayed in the Properties Table. If they do not have a value in common, the Table displays
"###". You cannot select entities of different types (for example, a note and a legend).
From the Table, you can click on a value to edit the property instead of going to the panel to
edit it. For example, you can double-click in a row and a drop-down menu is
displayed. From this menu, you can select a new property value:

Or, you can double-click on a value to display a dialog that allows you to edit the property's
values.

You can also double-click on a value to enter a new value directly into the row
.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 199


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

2.2 - HyperGraph 2D – Toolbars

The HyperGraph 2D toolbars provide quick access to commonly used panels and tools. The
following toolbars are available.

Chart Selector
The HyperGraph 2D Chart Selector toolbar allows you to select one of four plot types: XY
Plot, Bar Chart, Complex Plot, and Polar Plot. XY Plot is the default plot type.

Chart Selector toolbar

Curves
The Curves toolbar provides quick access to HyperGraph 2D panels. The panels available
depend on the plot type currently selected. To access a panel, click on the corresponding
panel icon from the toolbar.
For the XY Plot type, these panels are accessible from the toolbar:

Curves toolbar - XY Plot

200 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

For the Bar Chart plot type, these panels are accessible from the Curves toolbar:

Curves toolbar - Bar Chart

For the Complex Plot plot type, these panels are accessible from the Curves toolbar:

Curves toolbar - Complex Plot

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 201


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

For the Polar Plot plot type, these panels are accessible from the Curves toolbar:

Curves toolbar - Polar Plot

202 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Annotations
The Annotations toolbar provides quick access to the HyperGraph 2D panels listed
below. The panels available on the Annotations toolbar are the same for all plot type
options.

Annotations toolbar

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 203


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

3 - Plotting XY Data
Curves are plotted in HyperGraph 2D using the Build Plots panel. The Build Plots panel
allows you to create multiple curves and plots from a single data file. Curves can be overlaid
in a single window or each curve can be assigned to a new window.
This section we will cover how to:
 access the Build Plots panel
 plot curves from files
 plot multiple curves in a single window
 plot multiple curves in multiple windows

The Build Plots panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Build Plots icon on the Curves toolbar


 From the menu bar select Curves > Build Plots
 Graphics Area, right click > New > Plots From File

Many different file types are supported.


HyperGraph 2D can read the following types of plot data files:

204 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 205


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Once a file has been selected, the panel populates with the available data in the file.
The XY plots are defined using the Type, Request, and Component fields for X and Y.
Multiple items in the Y Request and Y Component fields can be selected, allowing for
multiple curves to be created at once.
Below is an example of how multiple curves can be created on a single plot in one step.
The X Type is set to Time, while the Y Type is set to Force.
Multiple items are selected for the Y Request (REQ/1 Curve 1, REQ/3 Curve 3, and REQ/4
Curve 4), and X is selected for the Y Component:

206 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

You can also build multiple curves on multiple plots. This is done using the Layout selection
in the lower left corner of the Build Plots panel. The available options for Layout are:
 Use current plot – Every curve is overlaid in the active plot window
 One plot per Request – Each selected Request is plotted in a new plot window with
the corresponding Components overlaid.
 One plot per Component – Each selected Component is plotted in a new plot
window with the corresponding Requests overlaid.
 One curve per plot – Each curve is plotted in a new plot window.
When any of the options above are selected, except the Use current plot option, the page

layout icon becomes active.


This allows for you to control how the plots are generated on each page.
For example, in the following plot, the same Y Requests are selected, and X, Y, and Z are
selected for the Y Component. The Layout is set to One plot per Request and the page
layout is set to a 3 window layout:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 207


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

208 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

4 - Evaluating Curve Data and Curve Referencing


In addition to simply plotting data, HyperGraph can be used to create new curves from
existing curves, using math expressions, and using pre-defined functions. In this section,
you will learn how to use the Define Curves panel to create these types of curves.
The Define Curves panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Define Curves icon on the Curves toolbar


 From the menu bar select Curves > Define Curves
 Graphics Area, right click > New > Math Curve / File Curve
Exisitng curves can be edited individually and new curves can be added to the current plot
using this panel.
On the Define Curves panel, the curve name is defined by a Templex expression instead of
a fixed string as in HyperGraph 9.0 and earlier. The Templex expression is visible in
editable fields only. In non-editable fields, the evaluated expression is displayed. In most
cases, the evaluated expression should match the text that was hard-coded in previous
versions.
Please see Dynamic Curve Names for more important information on this topic.

4.1 - Creating and Defining Curves


The Define Curves panel enables you to edit existing curves and create new ones. To edit
a curve, it must first be selected either from the curve list or picked from the window.
The X and Y vectors are displayed at the top of the Define Curves panel. The data sources
for the X and Y vectors are displayed in the text fields. Click either the X or Y vector radio
button or in the corresponding text box to select that vector for editing.

X and Y vectors on the Define Curves panel. The text field shows the data source for the vector.

New data can be selected from a source file, mathematically defined using the program's
curve calculator, or entered as values. The Define Curves panel changes depending on
which source is selected.

Constructing Curves
Expressions are constructed in the text fields next to the X and Y radio buttons. Expressions
are built by clicking on numbers, operators, and functions located on the curve
calculator. As the expression is built, each operator, function, and number is displayed in
the text field. An expression may contain basic math functions such as addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division, as well as trigonometric and signal-processing
functions. Expressions can also reference other vectors.
While the curve calculator displays only certain commonly used functions, over 100 math
functions and operators are available.
Note: See Math Reference for a detailed description of each function and its purpose.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 209


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Referencing Curves
Expressions can reference any curve or vector in the current session. Curve vector
references can be defined by picking the curve with the mouse or by using the following
syntax:
pmwnco.vector
where:
m is the number of the page on which the curve resides
n is the number of the window which contains the curve
o is the number of the curve in the window
vector indicates the X, Y, or time vector of the referenced curve
For example, p2w1c3.y references the Y vector (.y) of the third curve (c3), in first
window (w1), on the second page (p2).
When a referenced curve is edited or updated, the curves that reference that curve are
updated as well.
The Curves dialog provides a fast, easy way of referencing curves. To display the Curves
dialog, click Curves.... The dialog displays three lists: the Page list, the Window list, and
the Curve list.

Curve List
The curve list displays the names of all the curves in the active window. Curves can be
renamed, added, cut, copied, and pasted using the curve list controls.
Individual curves can be turned on or off. To turn a curve off, select the curve from the list or
pick the curve from the window and deactivate the check box next to the curve name above
the curve list. To turn a curve on that was turned off, activate the check box.
The Cut, Copy, Paste, and Add buttons are used to maintain the curve list for the active
window. Curves can be copied and pasted into other windows. Curves can also be added
and deleted from the list.

Data Sources
Curves are comprised of an X data vector and a Y data vector. The X and Y vectors can be
read from a data file, defined as mathematical expressions, or entered as values. The X and
Y vectors of a curve do not have to come from the same source.
If File is selected as the source, the file panel is displayed, allowing you to select data files
for the X and Y vectors.

210 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

If Math is selected as the source, the curve calculator is displayed, allowing you to define the
vector mathematically. The curve calculator contains many different mathematical tools and
functions. Please refer to the online help for additional information on these mathematical
tools and functions.

If Values is selected as the source, a table is displayed, allowing you to directly enter data
point values.
You can cut, copy, paste, and insert data point values to the table.

Click the expansion button to view a larger dialog containing all x and y data points.

Referencing Curve Vectors in HyperGraph


When creating a curve based on a mathematical expression, you need to supply a vector.
X and Y vector expressions can reference any curve vector in the session.
A curve vector reference defines the x or y vector (values) by page, window, and curve
number.
An example of a curve vector reference is p2w3c4.x, where:

p2 is page 2

w3 is window 3

c4 is curve 4

x is the vector

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 211


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

There are two common methods to specify curve vector references:

a) Pick a curve in For the x = input SHIFT and pick the curve to get the
a plot window field curve x vector reference

SHIFT + CTRL and pick the curve to get


the curve y vector reference

for y = input field SHIFT and pick the curve to get the
curve y vector reference

SHIFT + CTRL and pick the curve to get


the curve x vector reference

b) Select a curve vector reference from the Curves… dialog in the Define
Curves panel. This opens a window with a listing of all the curves in the
session in a tree format.

Now that we know how to reference a vector, we can create a curve using Math as the
Source. In the example below, the curve on the left is created from a data file. The curve
on the right is then created by simply taking the derivative of the curve on the left. Notice
that in the x and y fields, the vectors being referenced are p4w1c1.x and p4w1c1.y as the
curve on the left is in page 4, window 1 and it is curve 1 in the window.

212 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5 - Changing Curve and Display Attributes


HyperGraph 2D allows you to change attributes ( ); to add axes, headers, footers,
legends, and notes to plots.
The Annotations panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:
 Annotation toolbar

 From the menu bar select Annotations > …


 In the plot window, right click on a curve > Properties…

 Plot Browser Views > …

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 213


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5.1 - Curve Attributes


The Curve Attributes panel allows you to change different aspects of the curves that are
created. These include the line style, color, and weight as well as the symbol style and
color.
The following curve and vector (entity type) properties are visible and editable through the
Entity Editor:

The Curve Attributes panel can be accessed in several ways:

• Plot Browser > Curves View + Entity Editor > select a curve from the
browser list (suggested)

• Click the Curve Attributes icon in the Curves toolbar


• From the menu bar select Curves > Curve Attributes
Once the curve(s) has been selected, the Visibility field can be used to control the curves
display in the plot.

214 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The Show Label field is used to control the display of the curve label in the legend.
Using the Line Attributes fields, the following attributes are assigned: Line Style, Line
Color, Line Thickness, …
The option Shade Area (area under line), will shade the area under the line to the 0 marker
on the Y axis (see below). Notice how when the curve values are negative the shading is
still done up to the 0 marker on the Y axis.

The Symbol Attributes fields allow you to specify the Symbol Style (curve marker, default
is set to None), Symbol Color and Symbol Frequency (set the frequency at which the
symbol appears; by default this is set to 1, but if a symbol is only needed at every other data
location, then this value should be set to 2, etc.) for each curve.
The Data Attributes fields are non-plottable data that can be associated with a curve or
vector. An attribute may automatically be attached to vectors by external readers.

For more information on data attributes, please refer to the Online Help.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 215


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The Curve Attributes can be changed in several ways, as already explained, below the
suggested one:

 You can also modify x or y data (File, Type, Request, Component, Axis, …) from

Plot Browser > Curves View + Entity Editor > select x or y from the browser
list.

216 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5.2 - Legends
Legends are automatically generated when a plot is built in the Build Plots panel, or in the
Define Curves panel for bar charts.
They are displayed and positioned and their attributes are specified in the Legends panel.
The Legend panel can be accessed in several ways, as already explained, below the
suggested one:

 Plot Browser > Legends View + Entity Editor > select the legend option of a
curve from the browser list.

The curve legend displays the curve name and the line attributes that are assigned to the
curve.
Once the curve legend has been selected, the Visibility field can be used to control the
curve legend display in the plot.
The curve legend displays the Border Style & Color, Font Settings, Leader Position and
Legend Placement.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 217


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5.3 - Notes
Legends are automatically generated when a plot is built in the Build Plots panel, or in the
Define Curves panel for bar charts.
They are displayed and positioned and their attributes are specified in the Notes panel.
Notes are added to the graphing window using the Notes panel. The Notes panel can be
accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click on the Notes panel button, , in the Annotations toolbar


 From the menu bar select Annotations > Notes
 In the Plot Window, right click and select New > Note

 Plot Browser > Curves View > select a curve & right click > Single Curve
Math > Min Note or Max Note.

This panel allows you to annotate plots with a note. Notes are text boxes placed in plot
windows for labeling points, describing trends, and relating additional curve information. You
can create logic and expression-based notes using Templex.

218 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Note List
The Note list displays the names of all the notes in the active window. Notes can be
renamed, added, cut, copied, and pasted using the note list controls at the bottom of the list.
To edit a note, it must be either selected from the list or picked from the window.
Notes can be hidden or displayed. To hide a note, select the note from the note list or pick
the note from the window and deactivate the check box next to the Note: field. To display a
note, select the note and activate the check box.
The Cut, Copy, Paste, and Add buttons are used to maintain the note list. Notes can be
copied and pasted into other windows. Notes can also be added and cut from the list.
Notes can be positioned anywhere in the window by clicking and dragging the note box to a
new location. While moving, the note is represented by an empty box. Release the mouse
button to place the note at its new position.

Tabs
The Notes panel contains three tabs:

Notice the buttons at the button of the Text tab. These are shortcuts to Templex functions.
Selecting one of these buttons inserts the appropriate Templex function into the Text box.
Please note that while the Templex function is shown in the Text box, the evaluated value
will be placed in the actual note.
The Templex function and what they show when they are evaluated are shown below:

{X} Displays the X value of the attachment point


{Y} Displays the Y value of the attachment point
{Time} Displays the time value of the attachment point
{Label} Displays the name of the curve containing the attachment point
{Slope} Displays the slope (first derivative) of the curve at the attachment point
{Curv} Displays the curvature (second derivative) of the curve at the attachment point

The font style and size for the note can be edited using the Font button, . The text
Alignment can either be Left (default), Center, or Right.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 219


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The Attributes tab allows you to set the note box and text attributes. There is the option to
apply the changes made in this Attributes tab to the Selected Note, notes in the Current
Window, notes in the Current Page, or notes on All Pages. Once this has been
determined, the note box thickness and color of the note is selected. There is another Font
button, which allows you to edited the font style and size. This is different than the one in
the Text tab because this font style and size can be applied to more than just the current
note (depending on the Apply To selection). The Auto position option automatically
positions notes to avoid obscuring curves. The final option is Use Preferences. When this
option is clicked, the preferences set in the preferences.mvw file are used.

The final tab is the Attach To tab. This tab allows you to specify how a note is displayed in
the window. Notes can be anchored to either a Window, View, Curve, or Coordinates.
When Window is selected, the note remains stationary when the plot is repositioned in the
window. View allows the note to move with the plot when the plot is repositioned in the
window. The Curve option uses a leader to connect to the note to a specific point on the
curve and the note moves with the plot when the plot is repositioned in the window. The
final option, Coordinates, uses a leader to connect the note to a specific point on the plot.

The Notes can be changed in several ways, as already explained, below the suggested one:

 Plot Browser > Notes View + Entity Editor > select the note option of a curve
from the browser list.

220 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5.4 - Axes
Multiple axes can be added to plots using the Axes panel. Axis attributes such as labels,
color and scaling can also be modified using the Axes panel.
The Axes panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Axes icon, , in the Annotations toolbar


 From the menu bar, select Annotations > Axes
 In the Plot Window, right click and select New > X Axis or Y axis

 From the menu bar select Annotations > Options

The options available on the Axes panel depend on the current plot type: XY Plot, Bar Chart,
Complex Plot, or Polar Plot.

Axes panel - XY Plot

When you right click on an axis you have two options; New Axis and Convert Units. New
Axis will add an axis to the plot and automatically open the Axes panel with the new axis as

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 221


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

the current axis. The Convert Units tool allows you to convert the current unit of measure
of a horizontal or vertical axis to another unit of measure. All curves associated with the axis
are scaled accordingly and the axis label is updated to reflect the new unit of measure.
Multiple axes enable you to easily view curves of different scales on the same plot by
assigning the data vectors to separate appropriately scaled axes. Data vectors are assigned
to axes using the Scales, Offsets, and Axis Assignment panel for XY Plot. For Bar Chart,
they are assigned using the Curve Attributes panel > Axis Attributes tab. Complex plots
and polar plots do not support multiple axes.
On the Axes panel, the curve name is defined by a Templex expression instead of a fixed
string. The Templex expression is visible in editable fields only. In non-editable fields, the
evaluated expression is displayed. In most cases, the evaluated expression should match
the text that was hard-coded in previous versions. Please see Dynamic Curve Names for
more information on this topic.

The Axes can be changed in several ways, as already explained, below the suggested one:

 Plot Browser > Axes View + Entity Editor > select the axes option of a curve
from the browser list.

222 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5.5 - Headers and Footers


Plot headers/footers are titles displayed at the top of a HyperGraph 2D window.
Plot headers and footers can be added to any HyperGraph 2D window.
Each HyperGraph 2D window can display a header and a footer.

The Headers and Footers panel, , enables you to add headers and footers to your
plots, specify font colors, and access the Fonts dialog.
This panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Headers/Footers icon in the Annotations toolbar


 From the menu bar select Annotations > Headers/Footers
 In the Plot Window, click in the Headers/Footers area

Plot headers and footers are accessed by clicking on the corresponding tab. Click the Show
button to display the header or footer in the window. Titles for plot headers and footers are
entered in the text box. Press RETURN to add new lines.
Different font attributes can be specified for each line of header or footer text. There are
three user-definable styles available: Line 1 is the style assigned to the top line, Line 2 is
the style assigned to the middle line, and Line 3 is the style assigned to the third line and all
lines thereafter. Select a line and then click on the Font button, , to activate the Font
dialog box and change the font style, type, and size. Use the color palette to specify the font
color of the selected line.
There is a Show checkbox which allows you to turn on/off the display of the header/footer.
Finally, Apply is clicked to apply the selected settings to the header/footer.
On the Header tab of the Headers and Footers panel, the curve name is defined by a
Templex expression instead of a fixed string. The Templex expression is visible in editable
fields only.
In non-editable fields, the evaluated expression is displayed. In most cases, the evaluated
expression should match the text that was hard-coded in previous versions. Please see
Dynamic Curve Names for more important information on this topic.

The Headers and Footers can be changed in several ways, as already explained, below the
suggested one:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 223


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

 Plot Browser > Headers and Footers View + Entity Editor > select the
headers and footers option of a curve from the browser list.

5.6 – Datum Lines

The Datum Lines , displays only the datum lines in the session, grouped within their
respective page and plot folders.
The Datum Lines panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Datum Lines icon in the Curves toolbar


 From the menu bar, select Curves > Axes
 In the Plot Window, right click and select New > Datum Line-Horizontal or Datum
Line-Vertical

224 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Datum Lines panel - XY Plot

A datum line can be hidden or displayed on a plot by activating the Datum check box.
You can specify a math expression to define the display of a datum line.
Use the drop-down menu next to the Datum check box to switch between horizontal and
vertical datum lines.
Datum lines can be cut, copied, pasted, or added.

The Datum Lines can be changed in several ways, as already explained, below the
suggested one:

 Plot Browser > Datum Lines View + Entity Editor > select the datum lines
option of a curve from the browser list.
HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 225
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5.7 - Coordinate Info


The Coordinate Info panel allows you to retrieve individual point data on any curve in the
active window. When a point is selected, its data is displayed in the panel. The Coordinate
Info panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Coordinate Info icon in the Curves toolbar


 From the menu bar, select Curves > Coordinate Info

226 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

There are 2 ways to retrieve point data from a curve.

A point can be picked from a curve, located using the Find Point, or selected from the point
list.
 The Find Point allows you to step through each point in the curve, move to
maximum and minimums, and also jump to the first or last point in a curve.
 The Point List displays the XY data points for the selected curve. The point number,
the X-value, and the Y-value for each point is displayed in the list. Use the scroll bars
to view the entire list. Click
on a point in the list to
display the point data.

5.8 - Options: Setting Default Parameters for XY Plots


The Options panel allows you to set default parameters for XY plots.
The Options panel can be access in one of the following ways:

 Click on the Options panel button, , in the Annotations toolbar


 From the menu bar select Preferences > Options

There are four different tabs; Session, Range, Color, and Animation Cursor.

The Session tab allows you to set defaults for the Script File (mvw) and set the Precision
to be used in the session.

- Save All Curve Data to Script File - Choose this option to save all curve data to the
session file.
- Precision - This is generally used along with the Save all curve data to script file
option. It is used to set the precision for the curve values in the session file.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 227


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

- Enable Unit Scaling - Enables unit scaling. You can also display the Show Units
Dialog by selecting that option.

The Range tab includes settings for y and x axes.

- Use even cycles when fitting log axes - By default, HyperGraph 2D fits logarithmic
curves using the minimum and maximum values of the data. Select Use even cycles
when fitting to fit logarithmic curves using the next power of 10 greater than the
maximum and the next power of 10 less than the minimum.
- Use uniform aspect ratio - The aspect ratio of the plot area is locked. Distances
between values on the x-axis are the same as those on the y-axis.
- Default dynamic range (in decades) - Calculates the minimum value shown when
plotting non-positive numbers on a log scale. The minimum value shown is equal to
the maximum divided by 10 raised to the default dynamic range. To specify a new
dynamic range, enter a new range in the Default dynamic range text field or use the
buttons. The default is 4.

The Color tab allows you to set colors for the various regions of the plot window.
Any of the 64 colors can be assigned to plot elements such as plot background, frame, grid
lines, and the zero line. Choose a plot element, then select a color from the palette to
change the color of the selected element.

These regions include:


- Background - Changes the background color of the HyperGraph 2D window. The
default is black.
- Frame - Changes the color of the frame around the HyperGraph 2D window.
- Grid Line - Changes the grid line color.
- Zero Line - Changes the zero line color.
- Use Preferences - Sets the active HyperGraph 2D window's background, frame, grid
line, zero line, header, footer, tic, and note colors to the defaults specified in the
.preferences.mvw file.
228 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The Animation Cursor tab allows you to customize the animation cursor in HyperGraph 2D.

There are many options:


- Apply to - You can apply the animation cursor attributes to the Current Plot, Current
Page, or All Pages.
- Attributes - Select the width of the cursor line by choosing one of the four line styles
shown (Use curve color/style).
- Display as - Sets the animation cursor display type. Options include: Square,
Small/Medium/Large/Custom bar. For Custom bar, choose the size of the bar by
entering a value in the % Window height field. You can enter a value directly or use
the up and down arrows to choose a value (Coordinate marker).

Below shows the animation cursor as a Large bar:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 229


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5.9 - Style Sheets


The Style Sheets utility in HyperGraph allows you to select and apply attributes of the
current plot to either every plot on every page or to every plot on the current page. The
Style Sheets utility can be accessed in one of the following ways:
 From the menu bar select Tools > ApplyStyle
 Right-click in the plot window and select HGApplyStyle…

On the left side of the window (under Pre Selection), the page and windows to apply the
selection to are selected. Attributes are then selected from the right side of the window
(under Options). Place a check mark in the box to select the attribute you want to
apply. Upon opening the dialog, attributes that already have a check mark next to them are
selected by default.

230 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

6 - Curve Filtering
In this section you, will use the Define Curves panel to reference a curve for filtering.
In this section, we will use this panel to perform filtering on an existing curve.
The Define Curves panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Define Curves icon on the Curves toolbar


 From the menu bar select Curves > Define Curves

To filter an existing curve with one of the filter functions, the Source of the new curve must
be set to Math (as shown above).
After selected the x vector from the desired curve, the y vector for the filtered curve can be
defined. There are many filtering options available in HyperGraph. Click on the Filter…
button in the Define Curves panel to see the available filters:

Using this dialog, the Filter Class, Padding, and Direction are all defined. For this
example, the SAE J211/1 60 with Mirror Padding and Fwd-Back Direction is used. Once
OK is selected, the function is entered into the y field.
Notice how the first two entries in the function are left blank and the cursor is automatically
placed in the first blank spot. This is because an x vector and a y vector need to be defined
in this function:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 231


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Using the mouse, the SHIFT and CTRL keys are held down and the curve to be filtered is
selected. This places the x vector into this field. The cursor is automatically moved past the
comma into the blank spot where the y vector is to be defined. The SHIFT key is held down
while the curve is selected, populating this field with the y vector.

Now that the function is properly defined, Apply is selected and the filtered curve is plotted:

232 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Exercise 4a - Creating and Editing XY Plots from Data Files


In this exercise you will learn how to:
 Plot curves from files.
 Plot multiples curves in one window.
 Use the Advanced Plot Options dialog to change the curve and plot attributes

The Build Plots panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Build Plots icon,


 From the menu bar, select Curves > Build Plots.
This panel allows you to construct multiple curves and plots from a single data file.
Curves can be overlaid in a single window or each curve can be assigned to a new window.

The Advanced Options feature on the Build Plots panel allows you to apply many options
at once to the session during plotting. Curves created in this manner are added to the
session in a new layer.
From the Build Plots panel, click Adv. Options to display the Advance Plot Options
dialog.

Step 1: Load the file 4a-demo.dat and create multiple plots.

1. Open HyperWorks Desktop and set the application to HyperGraph 2D .


2. From File menu, select New > Session to clear all contents in the HyperGraph session.

3. Verify XY Plot is selected from the plot type menu

4. Click the Build Plots icon .


HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 233
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5. Click the Open File icon , and open the file ..\Model-Files\4a-demo.dat

Step 2: Build multiple curves on a single plot.


1. For X type: select Time.
2. From the Y type: column, select Force.
The data available in the file is listed under the Y Request column.

3. Under Y Request:, click the expansion button, , to easily view the Y Request list.
4. Under Y Request:, press and hold the CTRL key and select REQ/3 Curve 3, REQ/5
Curve 5, REQ/7 Curve 7, and REQ/9 Curve9.

5. Click OK to close the expanded list dialog.


6. Under Y Component:, select X.
7. Click Apply to create the curves on page 1.
The plot’s X axis is labeled Time (the X type), while the y axis is labeled Force (the Y
type). The plot’s title is X (the Y Component name). The curve’s names are the Y
Request names.

234 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 3: Build multiple curves on multiple plots.


While in the Build Plots panel, do the following:
1. Verify X type: Time is selected.
2. Under Y type: leave Force selected.
3. Under Y Request: leave REQ/3, REQ/5, REQ/7, and REQ/9 selected.
4. Under Y Component: press the CTRL key and select Y and Z to add them to the
already selected X.
-Or-
Press the SHIFT key and select Z. This selects Z and everything between X and Z.
-Or-
Left click on X and drag the mouse down to Z.
5. From the Layout: drop-down menu, select One plot per Request.
This option creates one plot for each selected Y request. Each plot contains as many
curves as there are selected Y components. The plot’s title is the Y Request name. The
curve’s label is the Y Component name.

6. Click the Page Layout icon , select the four-window layout from the panel area
.
7. Click Apply to create the plots and curves on page 2.

Step 4: Use Advanced Options to change the curve and plot display attributes.
While in the Build Plots panel, do the following:
1. Keep the curves you created in Step 3.

2. Click Adv. Options .


The Advanced Plot Options dialog is opened.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 235


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

3. To change the page title font, click Page Options on the left side of the dialog.
4. Click in the Font field on the right side of the dialog. Next, click the Font Value fields to
display the Font Selector dialog. Change the font size to 16.

5. Under Plot Options, select Header.


6. Click in the Header field on the right side of the dialog to activate the drop-down menu.
Deselect Y-Component.
This will remove the Y component from the header.

7. Select Horizontal Axis from the left side of the dialog. Click in the Font Value fields to
display the Font Selector dialog. Change the font size to 12.

8. Repeat steps 7 for the Vertical Axis.


9. Select Legend from the left side of the dialog.
10. From the Font dialog, change the legend font size to 10.
11. Select Curve Options from the left side of the dialog.

236 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

12. Click in the Label field on the right side of the dialog to activate the drop-down menu.
Deselect Y Request.
This removes the Y request from the label
13. Activate Show Prefix.
14. Click the Label Prefix field. Once the cursor is displayed, enter Test 17.

15. Click OK to exit the Advanced Options dialog.


16. From the Build Plots panel, click Apply to create the plots and curves on page.

You can also perform filtering on the curve.

For this exercise, retain the curve and plot modifications you just performed.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 237


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

17. From the Build Plots panel, select Adv. Options.


18. Click Curve Options on the left side of the dialog.
19. Activate Math Expression.
20. Leave Expression for x as is.
21. Enter the following filter in the Expression for y field: saefilt95(u,v,60,5,3).

22. Click OK. From the Build Plots panel, click Apply.

23. From Define Curves panel you will see the filter you applied display in the y vector
field:

238 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Exercise 4b - Multiple File Plotting to plot multiples curves in one


plot
In this exercise you will learn how to:
 Plot multiple curves in multiple windows.

The Build Plots panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 Click the Build Plots icon,


 From the menu bar, select Curves > Build Plots.

This panel allows you to construct multiple curves and plots from a single data file.
Curves can be overlaid in a single window or each curve can be assigned to a new window.

The Multiple File Plotting dialog allows you to select multiple files with intersecting data (for
example, multiple runs of a particular test) and plot the data from all files simultaneously in
the current HyperGraph session.

To access the Multiple File Plotting dialog, click the Multiple File Plotting button on
the Build Plots panel.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 239


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 1: Use Multiple File Plotting to plot multiples curves in one plot.

1. Open HyperWorks Desktop and set the application to HyperGraph 2D .


2. From File menu, select New > Session to clear all contents in the HyperGraph session.

3. Verify XY Plot is selected from the plot type menu .

4. Click the Build Plots icon .

5. Next to Data File, click the Multiple File Selection icon .


The Multiple File Plotting dialog is displayed.

6. Next to Select directory, click the Open File , and browse to the directory
..\Model-Files\4b-MultipleFiles

7. You can expand the folders in the File Browser List to display the files contained in
each folder.

You can select files from the File Browser List and click the arrow , to move them
to the Selected File Set. For this exercise, we will filter them.

240 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

8. In the File-Filter field, enter *T01 and press ENTER. The following files are displayed:

9. While holding the CTRL button, select the first eight files listed under File Browser List

and click the right-facing arrow , to move them to the Selected File Set.
10. Under Curve Name, leave Prefix activated and select Directory Level 2 from the drop-
down menu.

11. Under Curve Attributes (Color/Style), leave By File selected.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 241


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

12. Click Select to exit the dialog.


13. From the Build Plots panel, make the following selections:
- For Y Type: select Global Variables.
- For Y Request: select Internal Energy and Kinetic Energy.
- For Y Component: select MAG.
14. From the Layout: drop-down menu, select One plot per Request.

15. Click the Page Layout icon , and select the two-window layout from the panel
area.
16. Click Apply.

17. You can also view the curve Label Prefix and Label information in the Plot Browser.
These fields were edited using the Advanced Options dialog in 4a exercise.

242 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 243


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Exercise 4c - Perform Math on Curves Using the Plot Browser


In this exercise you will learn how to use the Plot Browser to perform the following tasks:
 Perform math on a single curve in the Define Curves panel without creating
duplicate curves
 Apply this math to all other curves in the session via the Plot Browser

Tools
The HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser resides on a tab in the Tab Area sidebar and allows you
to view the HyperGraph 2D plot structure.

The Plot Browser can be turned on or off using the View > Browsers > HyperGraph 2D >
Plot menu options. A check mark indicates that the HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser is
activated for display in the Tab Area.
You can use the Plot Browser tools to search, display and edit entities and their properties
within the current session.
From the Define Curves panel, you can edit existing curves and create new ones. To edit a
curve, it must first be selected either from the curve list or picked from the window.
The X,Y, U, and V vectors are displayed at the top of the Define Curves panel. The data
sources for these vectors are displayed in the text fields. Click the radio button for a vector
or click in the corresponding text box to select that vector for editing. In addition to the

244 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

traditional X and Y vectors, you can perform math on curves prior to plotting your data with
the support of u and v vectors. As a result, only one curve is generated in the session,
whereas in the older versions of HyperGraph, this could not be done without an initial curve.
To use math as a data source, from the Define Curves panel, select Source > Math.

Step 1: Open Session File 4c-demo_browser.mvw.


1. From the File menu click Open > Session.
2. Select the file ..\Model-Files\4c-demo_browser.mvw and click Open.

Step 2: Use the Define Curves panel to apply a SAE filter to a curve.

1. From the toolbar, select the Define Curves icon .


2. Activate the x= radio button.
3. Under Source, select Math.
4. In the x= field, enter u. This applies the u vector to the x vector.
5. Click Apply.
6. Activate the y= radio button.
7. Under Source, select Math.
8. In the y= field, enter v. This applies the v vector attributes to the y vector.
9. Click Apply.
You can now apply math to the y vector.
10. For the y vector, remove the v vector you entered in step 8.
11. With your cursor in the y= field, click Functions....
12. From the Functions dialog, select saefilt95 and click OK.

13. The saefilt95 function takes six arguments: vector1, vector2, scalar1, scalar2, scalar3,
scalar4.
14. Enter the following text in the function: saefilt95(u,v,60,20,3) and click Apply.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 245


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

15. The result is a corrupt curve. This is because the function expects the time to be in
seconds, and our curve is in milliseconds.

16. To correct this, you must apply the time vector by 0.001. Enter the following in the y=
field: saefilt95(u*0.001,v,60,20,3).
The result is a properly filtered curve:

246 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 3: Apply the math performed in Step 2 to all other curves in the session
via the Plot Browser.
In this step, you will apply the filter defined in Step 2 to all curves in the session using the
Plot Browser.
1. From the Define Curves panel, highlight the y vector filter you added in step 1 and
press CTRL+C to copy it.

2. From the Plot Browser, select the Curves view icon from the top of the browser.
This filters the session information so that only the curve information is displayed in the
Plot Browser.
3. Expand the folders for page 1 (p1: Angular Acceleration), window 1 (w1:XY Plot) and
Curve by clicking the plus button next to each folder.
4. As shown below, right-click on the y vector and select Select All.

All y vectors in the session are selected.


5. Go to the Table at the bottom of the Plot Browser.
6. From the Source drop-down menu, select Math.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 247


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

7. Notice that all the curves in the graphics area disappear, except for the curve we have
already filtered on the Define Curves panel.

8. Click in the Expression field and paste the filter you copied from the Define Curves
panel and press ENTER.
All curves in the session now contain the same filter and math.

9. It is not required, but you can also apply math to the x vector. Similar to the steps
above, right-click on the x vector from the Plot Browser and select Select All to select
all x vectors in the session.
10. From the Source drop-down menu, select Math.
11. In the Expression field, enter u.

248 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Now all vectors in the session have the same math.

Step 4: Take the integral of each curve.


1. Make sure that Window 1 on Page 1 is the active window (it will have a cyan box
surrounding the window).

2. From the Plot Browser, select the Curves view icon from the top of the browser.
This filters the session information so that only the curve information is displayed in the
Plot Browser.
3. Expand the folders for page 1 (p1: Angular Acceleration), window 1 (w1:XY Plot) and
Curve by clicking the plus button next to each folder.
4. As shown below, right-click on one curve and select Single Curve Math > Integral

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 249


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

This is an additional way to create plots based on single curves and multiple curves.
Notice how many of the functions available in the Define Curves panel are also
available using the Plot Browser.
5. Using either the Plot Browser or the Define Cuves panel, turn off the display of the
integrated curves. Using the Plot Browser, right click on the curve name and select
Turn off. Using the Define Curves panel, simply select the curve in the Curve list and
then uncheck the box next to Curve.

Step 5: Use the Coordinate Info panel to investigate the curve.

1. Entering the Coordinate Info panel by selecting on the Curves toolbar.


2. Click in the Plot Window on a point on the curve and notice how the panel is updated
with the Pt number, X value, and Y value:

250 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

3. Use the arrows to move from point to point .

4. Use the Maximum and Minimum, , to find the max and min of the curve.

Step 6: Save the session (optional).


1. Save the session by selecting File > Save As > Session.
2. Browse to a desired location and enter the name 4c-demo.mvw.
3. Click Save to save the file.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 251


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Exercise 4d - Modifying Plots with the Plot Browser


In this exercise you will learn how to use the Plot Browser to perform the following tasks:
 Modify the following plot attributes
o Header font size
o Legend position and font size
o Axis fonts
 Modify the following curve attributes
o Curve name and prefix
o Line style
o Color
 Add notes attached to curves
o Modify notes in the Notes panel
o Apply these changes to all notes using the Plot Browser

Tools
The HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser resides on a tab in the Tab Area sidebar and allows you
to view the HyperGraph 2D plot structure.

The Plot Browser can be turned on or off using the View > Browsers > HyperGraph 2D >
Plot menu options. A check mark indicates that the HyperGraph 2D Plot Browser is
activated for display in the Tab Area.
You can use the Plot Browser tools to search, display and edit entities and their properties
within the current session.

Step 1: Open Session File 4d-demo_browser.mvw.


1. From the File menu click Open > Session.
2. Select the file ..\Model-Files\4d-demo_browser.mvw and click Open.

Step 2: Modify the header font size.

1.From the Plot Browser tab, click the Headers/Footers icon, , from the top of the
browser.

252 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

These icons allow you to filter the data that is displayed in the Plot browser. For
example, by clicking the Headers/Footers icon, only the header and footer information
for each curve in your session is displayed in the browser.
2. Expand the folders for page 1 (p1: Angular Acceleration), window 1 (w1:XY Plot) and
Header by clicking the plus button next to each folder.
3. Right-click on Header and select Select All.

This action selects all the headers for each curve listed in the plot browser. By doing
this, you can modify a header attribute only once, but it will be applied to all headers.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 253


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

4. From the Table at the bottom of the Plot Browser, select the font icon next to Primary
Font Settings.

The Font Selector dialog is displayed.


5. Change the Font Size to 20.

The font size change is applied to all headers.

Step 3: Modify the legend font size and change the legend position.

1. From the Plot Browser tab, click the Legends icon , from the top of the browser.

These icons allow you to filter the data that is displayed in the Plot Browser. For
example, by clicking the Legends icon, only the legend information for each curve in
your session is displayed in the browser.
2. Expand the folders for page 1 (p1: Angular Acceleration), window 1 (w1:XY Plot) and
Legends by clicking the plus button next to each folder.
3. Right-click on Legends and select Select All.

254 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

This action selects all legends for each curve listed in the plot browser. By doing this,
you can modify a legend attribute only once, but it will be applied to all curve legends.

4. From the Table at the bottom of the Plot Browser, select the font icon next to Font
Settings.

The Font Selector dialog is displayed.


5. Change the Font Size to 12.
The font size change is applied to all legends.
6. Next, we will change the legend placement in the graphics window.
7. From the Legend Placement drop-down menu, select Inside-Right-Bottom corner.
The legend is moved to that position.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 255


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 4: Modify the axis font size.

1. From the Plot Browser tab, click the Axes icon, , from the top of the browser.

These icons allow you to filter the data that is displayed in the Plot Browser. For
example, by clicking the Axes icon, only the axes information for each curve in your
session is displayed in the browser.
2. Expand the folders for page 1 (p1: Angular Acceleration), window 1 (w1:XY Plot) and
HorizontalAxis by clicking the plus button next to each folder.
3. From the HorizontalAxis folder, right-click on Primary and select Select All.

This action selects all horizontal axes for each curve listed in the plot browser. By doing
this, you can modify a horizontal axis attribute only once, but it will be applied to all
horizontal axes.
4. From the Table at the bottom of the Plot Browser, select the font icon next
to Font Settings. Font Selector dialog is displayed.
5. Change the Font Size to 12.
The font size change is applied to all horizontal axes.
6. Repeat steps 1-5 for the VerticalAxes - Primary.
The font size change is applied to all vertical axes.

256 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 5: Modify the curve name.

1. From the filter icons at the top of the Plot Browser, select the Curves icon, .
2. Expand the folders for page 1 (p1: Angular Acceleration), window 1 (w1:XY Plot) and
Curve by clicking the plus button next to each folder.
3. Right-click on the curve name c1:50th% Hybrid 3 - LOWER TORSO -Res ang and
select Select All.
All curve names in the Plot Browser are selected.
The curve names contain the request and component information.

We will remove the Y Request from the curve name.


4. From the Table, click the Label drop-down menu and deselect the Y Request option.
The curve names shown in the graphics area now only contain the Y Component
name.

5. Activate Show Label Prefix.


6. In the Label Prefix field, enter Test 17.
The prefix Test 17 is added to the curve name label for all plots.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 257


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 6: Modify the curve line style and color.


In this step, you will change the curve line style for all curves that contain the components
XYZ.
1. Keep the Curves icon selected at the top of the Plot Browser.
2. Click the Add Filter icon, , to add a filter to the Filter Area.

3. From the Filter Name drop-down menu, select Display Name.

4. In the Value column, enter Res.


HyperGraph will search for all the curve names that contain a resultant and display only
those in the Plot Browser.

258 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5. Right-click on the first curve listed in the Plot Browser and select Select All.
6. Delete the filter you just added by clicking the Delete Filter icon, .
The Plot Browser displays all the other curve names that contain something other than a
resultant.

7. Click the Select Reverse icon, , to deselect the curves with resultant in the name
and SELECT the curves with component in the name.

8. From the Table, select the Line Style drop-down menu and select the dashed line style.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 259


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The line style is changed to a dashed line style for all curves with component in the
curve name. The curve name that contains the resultant remains a solid line.

9. To change the line color of only the resultant curve, click the Select Reverse icon again,

, to deselect the component curves from the Plot Browser and select the resultant
curve.
From the Table, select the Line Color and select the color black from the
color palette.

Only the resultant curve changes to black.

260 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 7: Add and modify notes.


1. Keep the Curves icon selected at the top of the Plot Browser.
2. Click the Add Filter icon, , to add a filter to the Filter Area.
3. From the Filter Name drop-down menu, select Display Name.
4. In the Value column, enter Res.
The Plot Browser displays only the curve names with resultant in the name.
5. Right-click on the first curve name listed in the Plot Browser and select Select All to
select all the resultant curves in the Plot Browser.
6. Right-click on the first curve listed in the Plot Browser and select Single Curve Math >
Max Note.
This adds a note to the maximum value of each curve in the session.

Next, you will use the Notes panel to modify the note.

7. From the toolbar, click the Notes icon, .


8. In the Text field, change Max:{Y} to this: Max of {label} = {Y} and click Apply.
The note now displays the label information.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 261


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Exercise 4e - Using Unit Scaling and Plot Browser


In this exercise you will learn how
• To create an Acceleration Velocity Displacement plot in one window
• To use the unit scaling feature for a plot.

Step 1: Clear any units association and enable unit scaling.


1. From the Tools menu, select Reset Units Association.

The Reset Units Association dialog is displayed.

2. If activated, click Reset Units to clear any unit associations. If Reset Units is grayed
out, you don't need to do anything.
3. Click Close to close the dialog.

4. From the toolbar, click the Options icon, . The Options panel is displayed.

5. From the Options dialog, make sure Enable Unit Scaling and Show Units Dialog are
activated.

262 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

Step 2: Open the 4e-nodout file, plot curves and set curve units.

1. From File menu, select New > Session to clear all contents in the HyperGraph session.

2. Verify XY Plot is selected from the plot type menu, .

3. Click the Build Plots icon, .

4. Click the Open File icon, , and open the file ..\Model-Files\4e-nodout
5. For the X Type: select Time.

6. From the Y Type: column, select Node Data.

The data available in the file is listed under the Y Request column.
7. From the Y Request: column, press and hold the CTRL key and select Nodal Point
2500001 and Nodal Point 2500002.
8. From the Y Component: column, select X Displacement, X Velocity and X
Acceleration
9. From the Layout drop-down menu, select Use Current Plot.
10. Click Apply to create the curves on page 1.
The Units Profile dialog is displayed.
11. From the Units Profile dialog, select the C radio button and click OK.

This sets the Length, Time and Mass units for the file to millimeter, millisecond, and
kilogram, respectively.
10. Click OK to close the Units Profile dialog.
The curves are plotted and the units for the vertical and horizontal axis are changed to
millimeters and milliseconds, respectively.
13. Click Apply.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 263


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The displacement, velocity and acceleration are plotted. Notice that two additional axes
have been added to the right of the window to accommodate the velocity and
acceleration data.(use your plot with your default settings.

Step 3: Modify the curve units.

1. From the Plot Browser, click the Curve filter icon, .


2. Expand the folders for page 1 (p1: Node Data), window 1 (w1:XY Plot) and Curve by
clicking the plus button next to each folder.
3. Select the two X Velocity curves from the list for nodal points 2500001 and 2500002

4. From the Plot window, right-click on the horizontal axis to display the following context

menu:

264 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

5. Select Convert Units and change the unit type from milliseconds to seconds (s).

6. From the Plot window, right-click in the vertical axis (Node Data) and select Convert
Units. Change the distance from millimeters to meters.
7. Repeat step 6, but for the right-side Velocity axis. Change the speed from
millimeters/milliseconds to mph.

8. You can also change the unit type for a curve by right-clicking on the curve and
selecting Enable/Change Curve Unit.

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 265


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 4: Plotting Basics

The Enable/Change Curve Unit dialog is displayed.


9. From the YVector, select the right-most drop-down menu and change the unit for
Velocity, from millimeter/millisecond to kph.

10. Click OK. The final plot window is shown below:

266 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Chapter 5

Modal & Frequency Response


(NVH) Analysis
This chapter covers the tools commonly used in HyperWorks Desktop for post-processing
results from a modal analysis. This chapter will cover the following topics:
 Viewing Deformed Shapes
 Contour Plots of Complex Results
 Creating Measure of Contour vs. Angle
 Creating Complex Plots
 Strain Energy Summation using Results Math
 NVH Post Processing Utilities

1 - Viewing Deformed Shapes


The Deformed panel allows you to specify parameters for deformation display. You can use
this function to see the motion of your model after analysis. You can display the original
structure and the deformed shape to see the total amount of movement, or view the deformed
shape by itself. You can also create an animation sequence of the structure’s movement that
shows the motion of the structure in a series of frames, based on what the analysis code has
predicted the model will do. You can animate a model using displacement results as well as
any vector result, such as eigenvectors, shape, and velocity, by defining the vector in the
Deformed panel.
To access the Deformed panel:

 Click the Deformed panel button on the Results toolbar.


 From the menu bar, select Results > Plot > Deformed

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 267


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Deformed panel

Deformed Shape:
The first step in the Deformed panel is to define the Deformed shape. This includes defining
the Result type and Scale factor to be applied.

Result Type - The result types available in the drop-down menu are determined by the solver
results.
The result types available in the drop-down menu are determined by the nodal vectors in the
results file. All vector result type data included in the result file, indicated with a (v), are
available for selection (displacement, velocity, acceleration, rotation, forces, moments, etc.).
All nodal vectors in the results file are available as a result type for deformed shape and
animation, including any user created nodal vectors by Result Math. An environment variable
hv_disable_animation_group controls the availability of all the nodal vectors (default
setting is "true"). Multiple animation sources are not supported for the d3plot (LS-DYNA), A0*
(RADIOSS), dsy (PAMCRASH), fai (MADYMO) file formats or any H3D files created from
these formats.
For example, Displacement (v) is available for Nastran results, however in addition to
Displacement (v), Eigenvector (v), and Shape change (v) are also available for OptiStruct
analysis and optimization results.

Scale - The following options allow you to set the scale for the deformation.
 Scale factor - Used to multiply the displacement to produce the deformed shape. This
option is available for all animation modes.
 Model percent - The deformed shape of the model is scaled, so that the maximum
deformation of the model is displayed as a specified percentage of the current model
size. The model size is the diagonal length of the axis-aligned bounding box which
contains all model geometry. This is available for modal and linear static animation
modes.
 Model units - The maximum value in the results is displayed as the number of model
units defined. This option is available for modal and linear static animation modes.

268 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Type - The following options allow you to select the scaling type that will be used for the
deformation.
 Uniform - Enter a value in the Value field to multiply the scale factor uniformly to
components X, Y, Z and their displacements relative to the selected coordinate system.
 Component - Specify different scale factors to different x, y, and z components of
displacement. Specify 0.0 to eliminate the movement in the specified direction.

Resolved in:
Once the Deformed shape has been specified, the Resolved in system is selected.
Select the result system in which you want to contour the results. Click the System input
collector to select a system by ID.
System options include Global, Analysis, or User-defined. Click the System input collector to
select a system by ID.
The available options are:
 Global System (proj: none) – Transforms vector and tensor results to the global
coordinate system.
 Analysis System – Displays vector and tensor results as they are output from the
solver.
 User System (proj: none) - Transforms vector and tensor results to a user-defined
system. This option is available when the results file contains a user-defined coordinate
system. Click the System input collector to select a system by ID or pick from the
screen. User systems can be FEA coordinate systems, MBD markers, or user-defined
tracking systems.

Undeformed shape:
Once the Resolved in has been defined, the options for the Undeformed shape can be set.

Show - sets how the Undeformed shape should be displayed:


 None - None of the undeformed shape is shown.
 Wireframe - Displays the undeformed shape as a wireframe.
 Edges - Displays the edges of the undeformed shape.
 Features - Displays feature lines on the undeformed shape.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 269


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Color - The Color of the undeformed shape can also be defined.


Select Component, Mesh Lines, or User.
If you select Component or Mesh Lines, default colors are automatically applied to the
undeformed shape.
If you select User, you can click the color button and select a different color for the undeformed
shape.

Move with tracking system - The Move with tracking system option can be used.
From the Tracking panel, define a tracking system for the deformed shape.
When you turn on Move with tracking system, the undeformed shape moves with the deformed
shape, allowing you to compare the two.
This is useful when you are using a transient simulation.

270 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

2 – Creating Contour of Complex Results

2.1 – Complex Results Introduction


Results in some analysis types come as complex numbers.
A complex number z consists of a real and imaginary part, and can be written (in Cartesian
format) as:
z = x + iy
Where:
x is the real part of z.
y is the imaginary part of z.

Complex number can also be written in the polar format:

where

, is the magnitude of z.
and

, is the phase of z.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 271


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

A response of a point under sinusoidal excitation (oscillation) can be described as:

Where , is the angular velocity and t is time. In HyperView, you can select the increment
of ωt (called "angle") from the Animation Controls (Animation toolbar) panel.

Click Animation Controls from the Animation toolbar.

272 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

2.2 – Complex Results in HyperView

Complex results are supported in HyperView and can be contoured using the Contour panel.
When a complex result is loaded, HyperView will automatically switch to Set Modal Animation
Mode .
After switching the animation mode to modal, an additional option appears in the Contour panel
which allows the users to set the Complex filter.

Contour panel with complex results

The Complex filter selections available are:


 mag*cos(ωt-phase) - The response with varying angle or ωt (in degree)
 mag - Magnitude (r) of the complex result
 phase - Phase (φ) of the complex number
 real - Real part (x) of the complex number
 imaginary - Imaginary part (y) of the complex number
Results that are complex are shown in the Result type list with a (c) appended to the result
name. The other selections in the Contour panel are the same for complex results, as they are
for non-complex results.
To view the contour of complex response at certain angle:
 Go to the Animation Controls panel, input the angle in the Current angle field and
click enter.
To view the contour animation of complex response and plot:

 Go to the Animation Controls panel , input the angle increment under Angular
increment field and click .

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 273


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Invariants for a complex vector or tensor


Complex results of invariants of a vector (like magnitude of displacement) or a tensor (like von-
Mises value of stress) can only be calculated at a specific angle from the response of each
components at that angle. For example, complex responses of x, y and z components of
displacement are:

For a specific angle ωt, the magnitude of displacement is calculated as:

Note that the response of an invariant is not a complex number. It can only be calculated at a
specific angle. When an invariant is selected for modal animation, HyperView calculate the
value at each specified angle increment for each response point separately.

Plotting complex curves


You can view the curve plot from the Measure panel.

274 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

3 - Creating Measure of Contour vs. Angle


Another post processing tool that is used for modal analysis results is the Measure panel.
Using the Measure panel, the contour value can be plotted vs. angle.
This is done by following these simple steps:

 Set the animation mode to the Set Modal Animation Mode, .


 Use the Contour panel to create a contour plot of the appropriate data.
 Add a measure group with the type set to Elemental/Nodal Contour.
 Select the desired node/element and then select Create Curves.
Within the Create Curves… window, select the Live Link option, set the Y Axis to
Value and select New Plot or Existing Plot to place the curve on.

In the example below, after setting the animation mode to Modal, the displacement magnitude
contour plot is created on the left. Then a Measure Group is added with Nodal Contour as the
type of measure. Create Curves is selected and a plot is created of the contour value vs.
angle.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 275


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Result Math can also be used to calculate the theoretical maximum vonMises stress value
from the Stress tensor.
This is done using the operator scalarextract.
This operator will report a scalar component from the selected Vector or Tensor value.
The default for the reported value is the max value.
Using the scalarextract operator and entering Stress as the table value and vonmises as the
component, we can find the theoretical maximum vonMises value.

276 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

4 - Creating Complex & Polar Plots


In addition to XY Plots, HyperGraph 2D can also create Complex Plots and Polar Plots.

This section will take you through how to use the tools in HyperGraph 2D to create a complex
plot and then how to create a polar plot.

4.1 - Complex Plots


Complex plots can be created in HyperGraph 2D by selecting the Complex Plot mode from
the Plot Types menu:

This then loads the Complex Plot toolbar into HyperGraph. Many items in the toolbar look
similar to those found in the XY Plot toolbar. The main difference is that inside the panels they
contain the necessary tools to create/edit Complex Plots.
To create complex plots, the Build Plots panel or the Define Curves panel can be used.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 277


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

The Build Plots panel can be accessed by clicking on the Build Plots icon from the
Complex Plots toolbar or from the menu bar by selecting Curves > Build Plots.

The Build Plots panel creates multiple curves and plots from a single data file. Curves can be
overlaid in a single window or each curve can be assigned to a new window.
This is similar to how the Build Plots panel works in the XY Plotting mode.

The Define Curves panel can be accessed by selecting the Define Curves icon from the
Complex Plots toolbar or from the menu bar by selecting Curves > Define Curves.
Existing curves can be edited individually and new curves can be added to the current plot using
the Define Curves panel. The Define Curves panel also provides access to the program's
curve calculator.

Notice how there are two entries for y; either yp/ym for phase/magnitude or yr/yi for
real/imaginary. The same is true when you add a new curve. You can either select Add P/M to
add a Phase/Magnitude curve or Add R/I to add a Real/Imaginary curve.
Once a Complex Plot has been created, you still have the option to switch whether you are
plotting phase/magnitude or real/imaginary.
In the example below, the plot is created first and it contains phase/magnitude data.

278 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

By right clicking in the Graphics Area and selecting Switch to Real/Imaginary, the
real/imaginary curves can be created. You can then switch back by selecting Switch to
Phase/Magnitude.

Another option available is the Swap Complex Axes Position.

This simply swaps the location of the Phase/Magnitude plots or the Real/Imaginary plots.
Below is an example where the original plot is shown on the left and the plot with the swapped
axes is shown on the right:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 279


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

4.2 - Polar Plots


Polar Plots can also be created using HyperGraph 2D.
This is done by selecting the Polar Plot mode from the Plot Types menu:

There are three polar plot types supported by HyperGraph: vector, phase vs. magnitude, and
radar.
This is set in the Define Curves panel.

Polar plots allow you to plot complex data and are very similar to HyperGraph 2D complex
plots. The phase axis for a polar plot is equivalent to the phase axis for a complex plot.

280 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

The mag-axis for a polar plot is equivalent to the magnitude axis for a complex plot.
The key differences are plotted polar coordinates - only a single frequency is displayed.
The polar plot toolbar is displayed when you select HyperGraph 2D from the application menu

and the active window is set to the Polar Plot mode .

Define Tip-to-Tail Panel

Using the Define Tip-to-Tail panel (Curves toolbar) you can calculate and draw the tip-to-
tail function based on the current plot. The tip-to-tail function is displayed immediately upon
curve selection.

Based on
The Define Tip-to-Tail panel first needs to know what to base the tip-to-tail curve on.
Select Off, All, Displayed, or Selected to determine the curve(s) on which the tip-to-tail
function is defined.
 Off - No vectors are selected and manual selection of curves is not permitted. No
resultant is displayed.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 281


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

 All - Bases the definition on all curves in the session. Manual selection of curves is not
permitted.
 Displayed - Bases the definition only on the curves displayed in the window. You can
select curves manually. To remove a curve from the calculation process, select the
curve(s) from the Available curves list and click the forward arrow to move the
curve(s) to the Exclude column.
 Selected - Bases the definition only on the curves that you select from the list.
This refers to the curve in the polar plot window.

Available curves
Lists the available curves in the current session.
 All - Click All to select all curves in the list.
 None - Click None to deselect all highlighted curves in the list.
 Flip - Click Flip to exchange the currently selected curves for the unselected curves in
the list.

Exclude
Lists the curves that you have selected for exclusion from the Available curves list. These
curves are not included when defining the tip-to-tail function.
To return a curve back to the Available curves list, select it from the Exclude list and click the
back arrow, .

Display Attributes
Select a curve or curves from the Available curves list and select a line style or line thickness
from the color palette to change the display attributes of the selected vector.

282 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

5 - Strain Energy Summation using Result Math


A common post processing needed is to take a result that is element based and sum the values
to find the part based value. One typical result that this is done with is strain energy.
This section discusses how to take strain energy values that are element based and use the
Derived Results Expression Builder to find the part (or component) based value. This same
procedure could be applied to any result type that is element based that you would like to find
the part based value of.
First Step
The first step is to load the Advanced Result-Math template into the session. This is done in

the Open Model panel ( ) and selecting the Result-Math template to Advanced.

Second Step
The next step is to contour the model with the appropriate result type. Again, in this example
we are interested in summing strain energy values, so the strain energy contour is applied:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 283


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Third Step
Next, in the Results Browser, under the Results > Scalar > Strain Energy folder, the Strain
Energy is right clicked on and Create > Derived Result is selected.
This opens the Expression Builder with Strain Energy loaded into the Table value (see
below).

For our example, set the Label to PartTotalStrainEnergy and select the Output to All
loadcases.
In the Operator Library, there are many functions available.
Changing the Operator filter so that only the Model operators are shown, we can easily find the
operator BCElemToPart.

284 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

The BCElemToPart will take all the element based values and create part based values.
Clicking on BCElemToPart also shows the BCElemToPart operator help.

Looking at the BCElemToPart operator help, one of the options is the Aggregation mode
which can either be average, sum, min, max, or extreme.
The default option is average.
For the part total strain energy, you want the Aggregation mode to be sum, so that each
element value is summed together to get the total value for the part.
Unchecking Hide default arguments and adding the Operator (double click on it) into the
Expression field shows all the available options for the operator.

The BCElemToPart operator is then updated so that the first argument is the strain energy
(S12) and the Aggregation mode is sum.
The other options are left with their default value.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 285


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Once the derived result is created, in the Result Browser there is now a new result type under
the Scalar folder called PartTotalStrainEnergy. Contouring the model with this result shows
the total strain energy value within each part.

286 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

6 - NVH Post Processing Utilities


Several tools are available for post processing NVH results. The tools that will be covered in
this section include:
 Modal/Panel Participation Utility
 Order Analysis Utility
 Waterfall Plots

6.1 - NVH User Profile


To access the Modal/Panel Participation Utility and Order Analysis Utility within
HyperView/HyperGraph, the NVH Preference File needs to be loaded.
This is done by selecting File > Load > Preference File and then selecting the NVH Utilities
and selecting Load.

This adds a NVH menu to the menu bar with the Modal/Panel Participation Utility and Order
Analysis Utility loaded:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 287


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

From the NVH menu, you can select the following options:

 Integrated Diagnostics (HyperGraph 2D)

 Modal/Panel Participation (HyperGraph 2D)

 Grid Participation (for HyperView only)

 Energy Distribution (HyperGraph 2D)

 Transfer Path Analysis (HyperGraph 2D)

 Design Sensitivity Analysis (HyperGraph 2D)

 Order Analysis (HyperGraph 2D)

 Model Correlation (HyperView and HyperGraph2D)

Please, refer to Online Help to get more details

288 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

6.2 - Modal/Panel Participation Utility


Modal participation represents the complex contribution of a structure or fluid mode to a
response. These modes can be systems modes in a modal frequency response analysis, or
component modes from CMS superelement subsystems.
Modal participation can be output from a modal frequency response analysis using the
PFMODE output request card.
Panel contribution represents the complex contribution of all grids on a structural panel to a
response. It can be output from a modal frequency response analysis using the PFPANEL
output request card.
Normal modes data can be associated to modal participation results using the Diagnostic
Results option on the right-click context sensitive menu of the response plot. Select and load a
normal modes data file from the Diagnostic Results dialog and click OK once the data in the
file is loaded. A dynamic context sensitive menu item Normal Mode Animation is available
from the modal participation bar plot, which when selected, generates a normal modes
animation plot.

Response plot - context sensitive menu

Diagnostic Results dialog

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 289


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Normal Mode Animation context sensitive menu item accessed from the modal participation
bar plot

In HyperGraph 2D, the NVH Modal/Panel Participation utility allows you to plot modal/panel
participation curves from an OptiStruct .h3d file or an MSC Nastran .f06 file.
When you launch HyperGraph 2D, the NVH preferences file is automatically loaded.
However, you must activate the NVH Utilities preferences file before you can use the utility.
The Modal/Panel Participation Utility is used to display and study the modal participation to
acoustic and structural responses, as well as the panel participation to acoustic responses.
This utility is launched by selecting NVH > Modal/Panel Participation from the menu bar.

290 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

The utility is loaded into the tab area as shown below:

This browser tab contains the following sub-tabs: Load, Display and Study.

It also contains icons for modal participation, , and order cut analysis, .

Load
From the NVH-Utilities tab > Modal/Panel Participation > Load sub-tab, select an OptiStruct
.h3d or MSC Nastran .f06 file that you want to plot modal/panel participation data for.
The Load sub-tab loads in the raw data and the results are mathematically manipulated to be
ready for display.

NVH-Utilities Browser - Load tab (Modal/Panel Participation)

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 291


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

From the File selection, Participation results field, pch and f06 files are selected and the
Load button is selected to load in the files.
Once the file is loaded, the Result selection is available to investigate the participations.

Subcase - Select an analysis subcase.

Result type - There are 2 results types that are supported:


 Modal Participation
 Panel Participation

Response ID - Grid ID of the response for which Modal/Panel participation results are available.
Select one from the list.

Response label - Enter a label that describes the response.

Direction component - X, Y, or Z.

Result set (optional) -There are 3 options that are supported:


 Structure Mode (only for Modal Participation)
 Fluid Mode (only for Modal Participation)
 Panels (only for Panel Participation)

The plots that are to be created in the next step can be customized using the display options.
Display Options… - a new dialog box is launched.
Within this window there is the option to display or not display the phase in the plot, set the
scale for the axis, and set the plot layout.

292 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Load Response - Once the result selection options are complete, select Load Response to
display the file data.

Display
The Display sub-tab provides different options to display the results. There are different
methods available for displaying the results.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 293


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

NVH-Utilities Browser - Display tab (Modal/Panel Participation)

Bar (default setting) - This allows you to plot modal/panel participations to an acoustic or
structural response on a bar chart. The first step is to select a frequency to look at. The
frequency value can either be selected using the slider bar or by entering a value in the
Specific frequency field. Next, Show highest contrib is set to the highest number of
contributors to display. Complex component can either be set to Projected or Magnitude.
Projected plots the scalar participation values after the projection to the response. The positive
values are in-phase with the response and the negative values are out-of-phase. Magnitude
plots the magnitude of the complex participation values. There are the only options available
when Bar is selected and additional options are available when a different plot type is selected.
The final option is the Rank by option and the two available selections are Abs of Projected
where the contributors are ranked by the area under the curve of the absolute values of their
participations projected to the response, and Magnitude where the contributors are ranked by
the area under the curve of the magnitude of their participations.
Below is an example where the following options have been set using the Bar plotting option:
Specific frequency: 40
Show highest contrib: 10
Complex component: Projected
Rank by: Abs of Projected

294 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

What this bar chart shows is that the highest contributor comes from Mode 13 with 53.44%.
The legend that is created shows the mode, the frequency, and the percentage. The bar chart
provides a good way to see the impact of a mode to a response. Other plotting options have
different advantages for showing the impact of a mode to a response. Below is a short
description of the other 5 options:

Polar - Creates a 2D polar plot of the contributing modes/panels at a specific frequency.


Enter a specific frequency in the Specific frequency field, or use the slider bar to select a
frequency value.
When you use the slider bar to select a frequency, a red line is displayed on the response plot
and is dragged simultaneously as you drag the slider bar. All other options are similar to those
for the Bar plot.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 295


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

2D Line - Creates a plot of the modal/panel participations to an acoustic or structural response


on a 2D line plot (overlay). Frequency range indicates the available range, based on your PCH
or F06 file. Using the From and To fields, you can customize your own frequency band.

Sand Dune - Creates a plot of modal/panel participations to an acoustic or structural response


on a Sand Dune plot, in which each contributor’s value is stacked on top of the previous ones,
thus generating a distinct color band for easy identification. Frequency range indicates the

296 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

available range, based on your PCH or F06 file. Using the From and To fields, you can
customize your own frequency band.

3D Polar - Creates a plot of modal/panel participations to an acoustic or structural response on


a 3D polar plot. Frequency range indicates the available range, based on your PFMODE.PCH
or .f06 file. Using the From and To fields, you can customize your own frequency band.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 297


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

3D Bar - Creates a plot of modal/panel participations to a 3D Bar plot. Frequency range


indicates the available range, based on your PCH or F06 file. Using the From and To fields,
you can customize your own frequency band.

3D Surface - Creates a plot of modal/panel participations to a 3D Surface plot. Frequency


range indicates the available range, based on your PCH or F06 file. Using the From and To
fields, you can customize your own frequency band.

298 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Study
The final sub-tab is Study. This tab allows you to manipulate the result data and see the impact
on the response. You can perform a Partial sum or Contributor overlay response study. To
enable this option, you must first plot the modal/panel participation curves.

NVH-Utilities Browser - Study tab (Modal/Panel Participation)

The response study section contains the following options:


Frequency range - Indicates the available range, based on your PFMODE.PCH or .f06 file.
Type – Type of response study.
 Partial sum study, select a number of contributors to exclude from the response, with an
optional percentage to exclude.
 Contributor overlay, select specific contributors to overlay with the response.where
specific contributors are selected to overlay with the response.
% to Exclude - Optional field that allows you to exclude a percentage of the contributors from
the response.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 299


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Select contributor (s) to: - Select the mode/panel or modes/panels that you want to exclude
or include in the response study.

  Click to select the entire list of contributors.


  Click to deselect your current selections.

 Click exchange the currently selected contributors for the unselected contributors.
o
Show difference curve as - Shows the difference between the original curve and the partial
sum curves.
To determine how the difference curve is displayed, select one of the following options from the
drop-down menu:
 % of Response

 Scale same as Response

Below is an example where Mode 13 was excluded. The dark blue curve is the original
response and the red curve is the partial sum response. Notice how at 30 Hz the partial sum
response has increased, while at 40 Hz it has decreased. From the information provided by this
tool, the user would need to decide which frequency is more important.

300 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

6.3 - Order Analysis Utility


Background, engine related noise, and vibration problems are typically linked to engine orders
that are harmonic multiples of the engine’s fundamental firing frequency. Understanding the
order content of the problem signal is a way to identify the physical phenomenon that is causing
the problem. To solve the problem, you can adjust the design parameters to modify the engine
operation, which in turn reduces the problem orders.
When you launch HyperGraph 2D, the NVH preferences file is automatically loaded.
However, you must activate the NVH Utilities preferences file before you can use the utility.
 From the File menu, select Load > Preference File.
 From the Preferences dialog, select NVH Utilities and click Load.

The NVH Order Analysis Utility generates and post-processes engine order related data from
a OptiStruct Analysis or Nastran frequency response analysis that contains either RPM-based
loading subcases or order-based loading subcases.
This utility is launched by selecting NVH > Order Analysis from the menu bar.

The utility is loaded into the tab area as shown below:

Similar to the Modal/Panel Participation Utility, there are 3 sub-tabs; Load, Display, and
Study.
These three sub-tabs operate in the same manner in the Order Analysis Utility (order cut

analysis icon ).

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 301


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Load
From the NVH-Utilities tab, Load sub-tab, select a OptiStruct Analysis or Nastran result file to
load.

NVH-Utilities Browser - Load tab - Subcase tab (Order Analysis)

File selection - From the Load tab > RPM/Order results field, select a frequency response file
containing RPM-based loading subcases or order-based loading subcases and click Load.
Once the file is read, subcases from the result file are matched to RPMs, or orders, and can be
reviewed in the Subcase identification section, located on the Subcase tab. The NVH-Utility
attempts to automatically match the subcases and orders by using text information in the
subcase label. If this fails, you must complete the Subcase identification section and click
Apply. Once the match is complete, the Order Response tab is displayed and the Result
selection fields are populated.
302 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Result selection - The following fields are available on the Result tab, under Result selection.
Under the Response tab, the Result type, Response ID, Response label, Direction
component, and Complex component are selected.

Range selection – The following fields are available on the Order Response tab, under Range
selection. Customize the RPM range and Frequency range fields as necessary. Once your
selections are complete, you can load the RPM-based response curves to generate a 3D
surface plot.
Plot Surface is selected to generate a 3D surface plot (shown below from the Top view).

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 303


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Order cuts -After viewing the surface plot, under Order Cuts, the Start, End, and Step fields
are used to specify the orders you want to see by cutting the surface plot. The Combine order
By option allows you to choose between RSS and Arithmetic Sum to determine how to
combine the order curves to construct the overall response. Load Response is then selected
to create the orders and order sum response overlay plot.
The default view for this is a 2D Line plot (as shown below).

Dsplay
There are additional views within the Display sub-tab for 3D Surface and Bar; please refer to
the online help for additional information on these views.

304 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Study
From the Study sub-tab, you can perform a Partial sum or Order overlay response study. To
enable this option, you must first plot the order analysis curves.

NVH-Utilities Browser - Study tab (Order Analysis)

Notice in the below previous order plot image that the curve for Order 2.0 is very close to the
Response curve. Setting the Type to Partial Sum, and Excluding Order 2.0 from the partial
sum, the affect this order has on the response can be seen (as shown in the image below).

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 305


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

6.4 - Waterfall Charts


Hypergraph 3D , one of the applications in HyperWorks Desktop, is a plotting
utility that enables you to generate 3D plots of your data. This can be used to generate a 3D
line, surface or waterfall plots.
This section will show you how to generate waterfall plots and edit them.
The Waterfall panel can be accessed in one of the following ways:

 From the Curves toolbar, click the Waterfall panel icon


Or
 From the menu bar, select Curves > Waterfall

The Waterfall panel allows you to create waterfall plots from XY force response data and input
pulses. This data must be plotted within HyperGraph prior to creating the waterfall plot.
Funtionality is easily accessible right under the mouse, from user-defined menus, and via
standard Windows user interfaces. Any analysis session, including sessions integrated with
other HyperWorks applications, can be run as an automation process over and over again for
processing new sets of data. The 3-D graphics window is fully dynamic, supporting rotations,
panning, and zooms without changing aspect ratios or losing axis labels.
HyperGraph 3D provides a rich tool set for querying 3-D plots. Both planar and surface sections
can be passed through 3-D data to generate section cut plots. Other query tools are as easy to
use as clicking on the data to view X, Y, Z values.
HyperGraph 3D also supplies features for building and analyzing waterfall data including order
calculations, visualization, and plotting orders in XY plots. In addition, HyperGraph 3D contains
readers for a variety of 3-D data formats and can generate 3-D plots from mathematical
expressions using an extensive math library.

Plot type
The waterfall Plot Type includes the following options:
 Frequency - default
 Order (scaled) - calculates orders by scaling the frequency value by the input
magnitude values.
 Order (resampled response) - modifies the time values of the response curve so the
FFT returns the order instead of the frequency.
306 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

 Order (variable DFT) - Calculates orders by scaling the frequency values by the input
magnitude values. Uses a DFT with a varying sample size to ensure a consistent density
of points along each waterfall slice.
 Once frequency or order is selected, a second drop down is available to select either
Time or Input Magnitude. Input Magnitude will plot the frequency/order against the
input curve’s magnitude (RPM, RPS, driving frequency, etc).

Data curves
The Data curves includes the following options:

 Response - curve is defined by either clicking on the curve selection button, , and
selecting the desired curve or by entering the appropriate math reference into the
Response field and pressing enter.
 Input - The input vector used to generate the response vector is then selected in the
Input field. Input field there is an option Input vector is in RPM. Select this option to
scale the response curve by 60 to use RPS.

Waterfall slices
The Waterfall slices includes the following option to define slices:
 Number - defines the number of samples or slices to take
 Step Size - indicates the step size to be used between each sample.
 Contour waterfall - option will contour the plot with the value in the Z direction when this
option is checked.

Below are examples where the Number of samples was set to 10 (left) and then 100 (right).
Notice that there is a great improvement in the display between 10 and 100.

Next the Step Size is varied.


Below is an example where the Step Size goes from 0.01 (left) to 1.0 (right).

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 307


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Once the number of slices has been determined, additional parameters related to the FFT are
defined under the Parameters heading.
 Sample size - This is the number of data points to use in each FFT. The available
options are 256, 512, 1024, and 2048.
 Window function - For the FFT. There are 6 options available including None,
Hanning, Blackman, Hamming, Kaiserparzen, and Welch.
 Amplitude type - is set to either FFT or PSD
 Weigthing - can be set to None, dB, dB(A), dB(C), or dB(U).
 Show all options - check box. When this is selected, additional parameters appear in
the panel. This additional information is shown below:

308 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Exercise 5a - Post Processing a Forced Frequency Response


Analysis
This exercise uses the file crank111.op2 as the model and results file.

Step 1: Load the file crank111.op2.


1. Load the …\Model-files\5a-crank\crank111.op2 as the model and result file.

Step 2: Animate the model at different frequencies and used the Deformed panel
to better view the deformation.

1. Select Start/Pause Animation to begin animating the model.


To create an animation, HyperView is going to interpolate the displacements coming from
the solver from 0 to 360 degrees.

2. To change the Angular increment enter the Animation Controls panel, .


3. The current Angular increment is set to 45. Change this value to 30 and then to 15.
Notice how the animation gets smoother the smaller the Angular increment is.

4. Select the Deformed panel, .


This panel will allow us to apply a scale factor to the deformation so that it can be seen
better.
5. Set the Result type to Displacement (v), the Scale to Model percent, the Type to
Uniform, and the Value to 5.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 309


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

6. Select Apply.
The displacements are now shown with a uniform scale factor of 5.
7. Within the Results Browser, select the drop down for Frequency and set the current
frequency to Frequency= 2.000e+003Hz.

Notice how the animation has changed to frequency selected.


8. Set the current frequency to Frequency= 4.000e+003Hz.

Step 3: Create a Contour plot of Complex Results.

1. Enter the Contour panel by selecting .


2. Set the Result type to Displacement (v) (c) and the component to Mag and then click
Apply.
The (c) in the Result type name indicates that the results are complex. The Displacement
contours are going through an interpolation of mag*cos(ωt-ϕ) where ωt is the current
angle, and ϕ is the phase. The mag and phase values come directly from the solver.

310 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

3. Change the Component value from Mag to X and then click Apply.
Notice that the Complex filter option becomes active and is set to mag*cos(ωt-ϕ).
4. Change the Complex filter to mag and click Apply.
Notice how the model is still animating (deforming) but the contour values aren’t changing.
This is because the Complex filter is set to mag. This is a constant value that doesn’t vary
with angle.
5. Change the Complex filter to phase, real, and then imaginary.
Again, these are all constant values that do not change with angle.
6. Change the Complex filter back to mag*cos(ωt-ϕ).

Step 4: Create a Measure to visualize how the contour changes at two nodes.

1. Stop the animation by selecting Start/Pause Animation, .

2. Enter the Measures panel by selecting from the Annotations toolbar.


3. Click Add under the Measure Groups to create a new measure.
4. Set the measure type to Nodal Contour.
5. Select any two nodes in the graphics area.
6. Set the Format to Scientific.
7. Select the two nodes in the node list and then click Create Curves….

8. Select the Live Link option, set the Y Axis to Value, and set Place on to New Plot.

9. Click OK.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 311


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

10. Return to the Contour panel and set the Complex filter to mag and then click Apply.

11. Click Start/Pause Animation to populate the XY plot with the updated values.
Notice how this plot is a constant value. This is because the Complex filter is set to mag.

12. Within the Contour panel, change the Result type to Stress (t) (c) and the component to
vonMises.
Notice how the Complex filter option is greyed out, just like it was when Displacement
Mag was selected. This is because this option isn’t available for the invariants that
HyperView calculates. If you were to select a component of the invariant (such as XX) this
option would be available.
13. Set the Averaging method to Simple and then click Apply.

312 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

14. Return to the Animation Controls panel and change the Angular increment back to 30.
Notice how the maximum value of the curve is no longer the same as it was with an Angular
increment of 15. This shows how the maximum value reported is dependent on the
Angular increment selected. In the next step we will explore how to calculate the
theoretical maximum value.

Step 5: Use Result Math to calculate the theoretical maximum vonMises stress
from the Stress tensor.

1. Stop the animation by selecting Start/Pause Animation, .


2. Right click in the Results Browser and select Create > Derived Result.
3. Within the Expression Builder, enter the Label as MaxVonMises.
4. For Table, select Stress.
5. Within the operator listing, with the Operator set to Math, scroll down and click on the
scalarextract function.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 313


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

6. Read the operator help.


This operator will report a scalar component from the selected Vector or Tensor value. The
default for the reported value is the max value. Using the scalarextract operator and
entering Stress as the table value and vonmises as the component, we can find the
theoretical maximum vonMises value.
7. Double click on scalarextract to add this operator to the Expression
8. Place the cursor within the parentheses, before the comma and select Insert to add the
Stress Table.
This adds T1 to the Expression as that is the internal reference to the Stress Table.
9. After the comma add vonmises.

314 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

10. Click OK.


11. Within the Results Browser, expand the Results > Scalar folders and then select the icon
before MaxVonMises to create a contour plot of the newly created result.
12. Enter the Contour panel and set the Complex Filter to mag, and the Averaging method to
Simple.
13. Click Apply.

14. Click Start/Pause Animation to populate the XY plot with the updated values.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 315


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Step 6: Create new curves within the Measure plot which represent the
MaxVonMises value for each node.
1. Return to the Measures panel.
2. Within Measure Group 3, highlight the 2 nodes in the node listing and then select Create
Curves…
3. Uncheck the Live Link option, set Y Axis to Value, and Place on to Existing Plot >
Window 2.

4. Click OK. Two additional curves are created for the 2 nodes, this time without the Live Link
option activated. Currently, the two new curves are overlapping the existing curves in the
plot window.

5. Click Start/Pause Animation .


6. Return to the Contour panel and set the Result type to Stress and the component to
vonMises.
7. Click Apply. The XY plot is updated and the curves that used the Live Link option are
activated. Notice how the Live Link curves do not reach the theoretical maximum values.
8. Enter the Animation Controls panel and change the Angular increment to 15. Notice how
the updated curves come closer to the theoretical maximum values.
9. Change the Angular increment to 10 and then 5. Notice how as the Angular increment
decreases the curves approach the maximum value. The advantage of being able to
calculate the theoretical maximum is that you aren’t relying on the value of the Angular
increment. This is especially important when you have large models.

316 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

Exercise 5b - Calculating the Part Total Strain Energy


This exercise uses the files neon_modal_ese.dat as the model and neon_modal_ese.op2
as the results file.

Step 1: Load the files neon_modal_ese.dat and neon_modal_ese.op2.


1. Set the …\Model-files\5b-neon\neon_modal_ese.dat as the model file and
neon_modal_ese.op2 as the result file.
2. Set the Result-Math template to Advanced.
3. Click Apply.

4. Make sure that the animation mode is set to the Set Modal Animation Mode, .
5. Within the Results Browser, expand the Results > Scalar > Strain Energy folders.
6. Select the icon before Strain Energy to contour the model with strain energy.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 317


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

7. Enter the Deformed panel by selecting, in the Results toolbar.


8. Set the Result type to Displacement (v), Scale to Scale factor, Type to Uniform, and
Value to 10.
9. Click Apply.

10. Select Start/Pause Animation, , to animate the modal analysis.


Notice how the deformation is exaggerated. This is because a scale factor of 10 was
applied to the deformation.
11. Stop the animation.

Step 2: Create a new Derived Result to calculate the Part Total Strain Energy.
1. Within the Results Browser, right click on Strain Energy in the Results > Scalar > Strain
Energy folder and select Create > Derived Result.
Notice that Strain Energy is listed in the Table. This is because we right clicked on Strain
Energy in the Result Browser to select Create > Derived Result.
2. For Label enter PartTotalStrainEnergy.
3. From the Operator drop down, select Model.
This populates the operator listing with the operators that pertain to elements, part,
materials, etc. These were made available by selecting the Advanced Result-Math
Template.
4. From the operator listing, click on BCElemToPart.
The operator help is populated with the help for BCElemToPart. This operator takes values
that are assigned to elements and assigns them to the attached parts. Notice that the
default aggregation mode is to average (avg) the elements. In this example, we want to
sum the element values for each part, so we want to set the aggregate mode to sum.
5. Below the operator listing, uncheck the Hide default arguments option.
Now when operator is added to the Expression, all the options will be listed.
6. From the operator listing, double click on BCElemToPart to add the operator to the
expression.

318 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

7. Within the BCElemToPart operator in the Expression, place the cursor before the first
comma.
8. Select Insert to add the Strain Energy as the first argument to the BCElemToPart
operator.
9. Update the second argument from avg to sum.

10. Click OK to create the Derived Result.

Step 3: Create a Contour plot of PartTotalStrainEnergy and then change the


Model being displayed.
1. Use the Results Browser to create a contour plot of the PartTotalStrainEnergy (it will be
listed under the Scalar folder).
Notice how each part has a single contour value.
2. Also using the Results Browser, change the mode being displayed to Mode #3
Frequency= 2.4772+001Hz.
3. Animate the model.
4. Now change to Mode #5 Frequency= 3.486e+001Hz.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 319


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

5. Stop the animation.

Step 4: Use the Advanced Query function to isolate the components that exceed a
PartTotalStrainEnergy value of 400.

1. Next, enter the Query panel by selecting in the Results toolbar.


2. Click Advanced… in the lower right corner of the panel.
This opens the Advanced Query Window.
3. Set Apply to to All and Components and then set the Value to >= and enter in a value of
400.
4. Select Apply.

320 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

This finds all the parts with a PartTotalStrainEnergy value of 400 or more. These values
are shown in red in the table. Also because the Warning threshold was selected, all
values within 85% of 400 are found and reported in blue.
5. Click on the Max Value column header twice.
This sorts the reported values by value.

6. Click on the first reported value in the table. Move the Advanced Query Window to view
the graphics window. Notice how the component selected is isolated. This is a quick and
easy way to find the components that fail a criterion.

7. Click on other values in the table to see the appropriate components isolated.
8. Click Close to close the Advanced Query Window.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 321


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 5: Modal & NVH Analysis

322 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Chapter 6

Crashworthiness
This chapter will cover the necessary tools for post processing a crash analysis (transient
event).

The topics covered include:


 Measures – Distance Between and Position
 Section cuts
 Vector plots
 Tracking
 Tracing
 Exploded views
 Synchronizing data
 Video/Image overlay
 Export deformed shape
 Crash Tools for Plotting
 Collision detection

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 323


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

1 - Measures – Distance Between and Position


The Measure panel was first introduced in Chapter 3.
This section will focus on how to use the Measure panel to measure the Distance Between two
entities and also to measure an entities Position.

Distance Between
By setting the Measure Type to Distance Between, we can measure the distance between two
entities over a period of time.
You can measure the distance between either two Nodes or two Systems.
Create a measure using Results browser > Model View + Entity Editor.

324 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

In the example below:


Standard > Entity IDs > Nodes, the right front tire and the right rear tire nodes are selected.

Then the Standard >Items > Select … > Create Curves option was selected.

This opened a new dialog box to set Axis and Live Link option > OK and a curve was created.

This curve has the magnitude as the Y axis and time as the X axis.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 325


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Once the model is animated, the curve is created and plotted:

Position
Setting the Measure Type to Position allows you to measure the X, Y and Z position of a Node
or System.
For example, the position of 1 or multiple nodes over a crash event
Set the Measure Group type to Position and select 1 or multiple nodes.

326 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Using the same model and nodes as in the image above, a Measure Group was created at
each node. Notice how in the Graphics Area the X, Y, and Z positions are reported.
Curves are created for each Measure Group as well using the X position as the Y axis and time
as the X axis:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 327


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

2 - Section Cuts
The Section Cut panel allows you to cut planar or deformable sections through a model.
This is useful if you want to see details inside a model.
Create a section cut using Results browser > Model View + Entity Editor.

To access this panel, click the Section Cut icon , on the Display toolbar to display the
Section Cut panel.

You can also use the Results Browser > Model View > Create > Section Cut to set the
section cut in the Entity Editor.

328 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The section cuts defined for the current model are listed in the Section Cuts list.

You can add and delete section cuts in the list using the Create and Delete.
The browser allows you to display one or more section cuts.
To create a section cut, you must first define the plane of the section that you want to view.
A plane is defined by using one of the following methods Standard > Type > Section Plane
dialog box:
 X, Y, or Z Axis: Cuts the model along the designated axis. The base node is optional if
you want to specify a certain location to cut the model.
 Vectors: Uses a predefined vector.
 N1 N2 N3: Defines the normal direction of the cutting plane when nodes are picked on
the model for N1, N2, and N3 using the mouse.
 Normal to screen: Specify a plane normal to the screen by picking a base node on the
model.
 Base: Allows you to check the current position of the section cut. Double-click on Base
to enter a Base Node ID or enter user-defined X, Y, and Z coordinates.

Once a plane is defined, Standard > Position and Manipulator (drag it with your left mouse
button) in the graphic area can be used to examine your model by controlling the position of the
section cut.

You can also choose how you want the section cut to be applied to the model. By default, it
displays a section cut of the model when the model passes through the plane.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 329


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Display > Deformable allows the sections cut to be deformed, along with the components,
during animation.

There are also various display options available for a section cut.
The section cut can be displayed as:
Cross section Only

Cross section Width Widths

330 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Clip Elements

This will clip the elements that pass through the section cut so that a smooth section cut is
shown. Unchecking this option will not clip the elements so that the whole element is shown.
The Section color option allows you to assign a color to the cross section.
The Grid option simply adds a gridline to the section cut.
There are also options for displaying the clipped geometry as:
Feature Lines

Transparency mode

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 331


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Cross-Section Measurements and Path Plots


Measures can be defined on the nodes of a cross-section enabling a deeper analysis of the
deformation of the section.
Typical applications of measuring values on the cross-section include plotting the position or
distance between nodes on the cross-section (as measuring the intrusion shown in the image
below).
A distance between measures on the opposing sides of the vehicle B-pillar section shows how
close the structure is intruding into the occupant compartment.
The measurement on a cross-section can be helpful in identifying the minimum distance
separating the two sides that may not be possible by considering only the mesh nodes.

In addition to making position based measurements on the nodes of a cross section, you can
also graph the section or any portion of the continuous segments by defining a node path on
the cross-section cuts and cross plotting node X, Y, or Z locations (or the distance between
them).
Result variations along a section cut can also be studied by defining a node path along the cut.
This helps engineers to assess the variation of a result along a user specified path on a cut
section.
For stamping, it is often necessary to validate simulation against test data.
One of the common ways to obtain test data is to cut the stamped part into two pieces and then
measure the thickness along the length of the cut.
To be able to compare FEA results against such data, a path needs to be defined along the cut
section of the FEA model and must be able to plot a selected FEA results type as illustrated
below:

332 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The nodes on the section cuts are also accessible from the Notes panel to attach any text
based annotations to the cross sections.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 333


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

3 - Vector Plots
The Vector panel allows you to create vector plots that can be used to display any vector data
associated to nodes. Examples include displacement, velocity, and acceleration.

To access the Vector panel:

 Results browser > Result View

 Click the Vector button, , on the Results toolbar


 From the main menu select Results > Plot > Vector

The Vector panel works in the same way that the Contour or Tensor panels work.

First you must define the Result Type.


For the Vector panel, all results are nodal vector results, and when available the Layers can
also be specified.
You can also select the Components that should be shown. Once the Result type and
Components are selected, the Selection can be made as Nodes, Elements, or Components.
If a cross section has been created and is active, there will be a Section selection available.
When entities are not selected for the Selection, the entire model has the vector plot applied to
it.

334 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The Resolved in system also works the same as in the Contour panel.
Once you have created a vector plot, you can change how the vectors are displayed using the
Display tab options.

The Size scaling sets how the vectors are scaled or sized. The three options are Auto, By
Magnitude, and Uniform.
 Auto: Automatically scales the vector length at approximately 2% of the model size.
 By Magnitude: The vector size is displayed relative to the value of the vectors. The
Scale value text box allows you to increase or decrease the size according to a scaling
value.
 Uniform: This displays all vectors in a uniform size. You can increase or decrease the
size using the Scale value text box.

The Color by option either shows the vector colored by the Value of the vector or by the
Direction. When Direction is selected, the X component is colored red, the Y component is
colored green, and the Z component is colored blue.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 335


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The next Display option sets how the vector is displayed. The Vector heads can either be set
to None or Arrow and the vector head can either be placed at the vector Tail, Tip, or Center.

The options included in the Plot tab.

The available settings are Resultant or Components. This shows the vectors as either a
single resultant vector or the components.
The final option, Show values, allows you to display the vector values in the graphics area.

336 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The options included in the Legend tab and Result display control options, behave the same
as in the Contour panel.
This includes the Plot Styles and accessing the plot styles from the Results Browser.

Once the Selection and Display options have been selected, there are additional options
available under the Section tab, where you can select options for projecting the vectors to the
cross section plane.
A section cut has been applied to the model: the Selection input collector is set to Sections
and the Resolved in system is set to Global
There are two additional options available in the Section tab.

These are Projected and Evenly distributed.


Projected will project the vectors onto the cross section. Below is an example of velocity
vectors before and after the projection:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 337


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Evenly distributed will evenly distribute the vectors on the cross section by the specific
Number of rows and Number of columns.
Below is an example of the default distribution of vectors and an evenly distributed set of
vectors.

338 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

4 - Tracking Systems
The Tracking panel allows you to track any entity during animation. When an entity is tracked,
the view remains constant with respect to the selected displacements and rotations of that
entity. This enables you to view the dynamics of a model as the selected entity remains in the
same location.
To access the Tracking Systems:

 Results browser > Model View > Create > Tracking System

 Click the Tracking icon , on the Results toolbar


 Right click in the graphic area

 Main menu Results > Create > Tracking System

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 339


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

HyperView now supports both model based and window based tracking systems.
Tracking systems still belong to a particular model and are still defined using entities from a
particular model, however the mode for a tracking system can now be set to either model based
or window based.
By default, a newly created tracking system will be model based. To change the mode to
window based, activate the Window track option (located on the right side of the panel).

Tracking Systems
The tracking systems defined for the current model are listed in the Tracking Systems list or in
the Results > Model View browser.
Tracking systems can be added to the Tracking Systems list (using the Add button) and then
defined using a node, plane, component, or system.
Keyboard shortcuts are also available for selecting items within the list:
 Press the SHIFT or CTRL key on the keyboard + the left mouse button to select multiple
items from the list.
 Press the CTRL + A keys on the keyboard to select all items in the list.
 Press the DELETE key on the keyboard to delete the selected tracking system(s).

A tracking system is activated, or deactivated, using the radio button.


In addition, you can access the following context menu options by right-clicking anywhere within
the Tracking Systems list:

Delete - Deletes the selected tracking system(s) from the list.

340 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Rename - Displays the Rename dialog, which allows you to rename the selected tracking
system.
Make Current - Allows you to select which tracking system will be activated and displayed in
the graphics window. This option performs the same action as clicking the radio button "on" next
to a tracking system.
You can sort the items in the Tracking Systems list by clicking on the list heading.
If Clear Tracking System is selected, no tracking system will be applied to the model.
Activating the Clear Tracking System option clears the contour, and deactivates all of the
tracking systems listed.
A tracking system is associated with a model. When overlaying two models in the same window,
you need to define a tracking system for each model for model shape comparison.
Tracking systems from other models in the window will be displayed in the Tracking Systems
list provided those tracking systems are "window" based.
For example, the first tracking system (T1) from the first model (M1) will be displayed as M1:T1
in another model's tracking systems list.

Track
The Track options allow you to set the parameters that define a tracking system.

Select an option from the drop-down menu and then define a Node, Plane and Plane type,
Component,
The model is animated with respect to the selected entity. A new node, plane, component, or
coordinate system can be defined and tracked at any time during animation by picking different
nodes or components in the window.
Plane type - This option is activated for Plane tracking systems only!
For tracking systems defined by a Plane, the local axis of the tracking systems can be aligned
with any specific global direction by specifying the Plane type (available options are: OXY,
OYZ, and OZX). This is useful in situations where the global coordinate system alignment differs
from the model coordinate system.
This option allows you to specify the local plane defined by three nodes. The normal vector of
the plane is computed by a cross product of planar vectors formed by N1, N2, and N3:
 The first node (N1) always defines the Origin of the local coordinate system (the tracking
system).

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 341


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

 The direction from the first node (N1) to the second node (N2) defines the local axis. Use
the Plane type drop-down menu to select one of the following:
o OXY - X-axis
o OYZ - Y-axis
o OZX - Z-axis
 The third node (N3) lies in the plane of interest.

Input Collector - The input collector allows you to select, or change, the entities which will be
used to define the tracking system. You can do this by picking entities directly from the screen
or by clicking the Nodes, Components input collector.

Displacements

Use the check boxes to select which displacements remain fixed within the window.
Global X - locks the view to the X position of the selected entity as it moves. The entity appears
to remain stationary along the global X direction during animation.
Global Y - locks the view to the Y position of the selected entity as it moves. The entity appears
to remain stationary along the global Y direction during animation.
Global Z - locks the view to the Z position of the selected entity as it moves. The entity appears
to remain stationary along the global Z direction during animation.

For example, selecting Global X locks the view to the X position of the selected entity as it
moves. The entity appears to remain stationary along the global X direction during animation.
Entities can also be tracked with respect to rotation. This is done by activating the Lock
rotations check box to lock the rotation movement of the selected entity.

Rotations
Entities can be tracked with respect to rotation. Activate the Lock rotations check box to lock
the rotational movement of the selected entity.

342 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Window track
Activate this option to change the tracking system mode from "model" based to "window" based.
Window based tracking systems from other models in the window will be displayed in the
current model's tracking systems list (provided the current model also contains window based
tracking systems).
For example, the first tracking system (T1) from the first model (M1) will be displayed as M1:T1
in another model's tracking systems list. The entity definition for other models cannot be
changed, however other properties of the tracking system can be changed (even though they
are not part of the current model).
A tracking system will be removed from another model's tracking systems list whenever the
Window track option is deactivated (changing the mode from "window" based back to "model"
based).

Once a tracking system is created, the Use Tracking System option will become available on
other panels. For example, this option is available in the Contour panel. This allows you to
create a contour plot with respect to this tracking system. Below is an example with and without
a tracking system in a contour plot:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 343


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

5 - Tracing
System, component, and node entities can be traced during animation. Line tracing for metal
forming can also be performed by selecting nodes directly on the model or by importing a
trimmed line definition. When an object is traced, an outline of the object is left behind at certain
intervals along the path of motion.
To access the Tracing:

 Click the Tracing icon , on the Annotations toolbar


 Main menu Annotations > Tracing

You can trace nodes, components, systems and line by selecting one of the following Trace
options: Node, Component, System or Line. Select the entity you want to trace By ID using
the input collector or by picking them from the screen.
The selected entities are displayed in the list box below the input collector.
You can remove highlighted entities from the list by clicking on the Delete button.
You can also trace lines by activating the Line option, under Trace, and selecting either nodes
or a trimmed line definition file as the line source.

344 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The image below shows a couple of examples.

Once the entities are selected, the Tracing mode is defined.


When From first step is selected, the selected entities are traced starting at the first step to the
current step as the model is animated.
For components, an outline of the selected entities is left behind at each time step.
The traced path is erased when the animation starts over.
If you are tracing nodes or systems, a line is drawn to illustrate the traced entities.
When All steps is selected, all steps of the selected entities are traced.
The final option, Last, restricts the traced path to the last user-specified time steps before the
current step.
This gives the appearance that the path is following the selected entities.
Finally, the Display options are set. This allows you to se the Color and Thickness of the
trace (except when component is selected).
Move with tracking system allows the trace to move along with entities relative to an active
tracking system.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 345


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

6 - Exploded View
The Exploded View panel allows you to explode a model or selected components for improved
visualization.
You can then continue to select entities and perform post-processing procedures on the
exploded model.
Multiple explosions can be saved as part of a session file (*.mvw file) to be used later for design
review or presentations.
To access the Exploded View:

 Click the Exploded View icon , on the Visualization toolbar

By default there are two options available in the Explosions listing; Clear Explosion and
Automatic Explosion.
When Clear Explosion is selected, no explosion is applied on the model.
When Automatic Explosion is selected, the explosion is applied to the entire model using pre-
defined settings for center of gravity, direction, and magnitude.
Below is an example of the Automatic Explosion:

The explosions defined for the current model are listed in the Explosions list.

346 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Customized explosions can be added and deleted using the Add and Delete buttons.

The radio buttons allow you to select which explosion will currently be displayed in the graphics
window.
You can also select multiple explosion(s) and click the Delete button, in order to delete the
selected explosions from the Explosions list.
To create a custom explosion, the Components to be included in the explosion need to be
selected under Selection.
Then the Mode needs to be selected to determine the origin and orientation of the explosion:
 Translate allows you to define the direction and distance (measured in model units) of
the model translation.
 Explode from model center sets the origin of the explosion at the model center
 Explode from selection center sets the origin at the center of the selected component.
For both, the orientation of the explosion is defined using the Scale factor.

o The Scale factor can either be set to Uniform (all 3 directions translated uniformly)
or Component (each direction can be translated a specified distance). Below is an
example where a single component is exploded:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 347


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Finally, to translate the components in the explosion, is selected.


This moves the model explosion in (-) and out (+) based on the mode and distance (measured
in model units) or the designated scale factor.
There are two final options; Auto fit and Reset.

When Auto fit is activated, each time an explosion is added or deleted, the view is adjusted so
that the exploded model fits in the window. If this option is not selected, the view is not adjusted
and parts of the model could move out of the window.
Reset simply returns the components to their default locations.

348 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

7 - Synchronizing Data and Windows


The data obtained from a solver is generally on a different time scale than that of videos
captured while prototype testing.
In order to correlate the two, it is essential to bring them both to the same time scale and then
apply the necessary changes so that they can be synchronized and studied together.
This chapter outlines the procedure on how to synchronize data obtained from a solver to that of
video captured while actual testing.
Synchronizing Data
To access the Synchronize Animation:
 Tools menu > Synchronize Animation to display the dialog

 Visualization toolbar > Animation Controls icon > Time Scales… button

 Click the Image Planes icon , on the Annotations toolbar

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 349


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The Synchronize Window Animation dialog allows you to synchronize the animation, plot, and
video windows on a page by applying appropriate scaling and offset values.
This tool is useful for synchronizing windows that contain animation results in different units
and/or begin at different time steps.
Each window in the current page is listed in the Synchronize Window Animation dialog.
The slider bar represents the global time line for all windows. It reflects all window time frames
regardless of whether they are active or inactive. Each time frame is a subset of the range
represented on the slider bar.
Current time displays the current slider bar setting.

Synchronize Window Animation slider bar

There are two methods you can use to synchronize multiple animations:
 Using the slider bar
Use the slider bar to specify a time for all active Time A and Time B fields.

When the desired value is displayed in a specific field, click the lock button to set the
value. After all fields have been defined, click Apply to automatically calculate and
synchronize the animations.
When you click Apply, the scale factors for the time values for each window are
automatically calculated. The scale factor is calculated by subtracting Time A from Time
B for each window. The end result is all the frames specified for Time A will appear at
the same time during the animation. Similarly, all frames for Time B will appear at the
same time. All other frames will be scaled accordingly.
In this mode, you cannot enter data in the Scaling and Offset fields. They are used for
reference only.

350 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

 Editing scaling and offset


o Scaling - Multiplies the total running time of the animation by the specified amount.
The animation is then scaled to run within the new time boundaries. An animation
file that runs from 0 to 10 seconds scaled by a factor of 2 runs from 0 to 20 seconds.
Likewise, if the scale factor is 0.5, the animation is adjusted to run from 0 to 5
seconds.
o Offset - Specifies how long to wait before animating the corresponding window.
When the page reaches the specified time value, animation starts in the delayed
window.
o T1-T0 - Allows you view the time scale before the scale factor is applied (for
reference only).
o Scaled T1-T0 - Allows you view the time scale after the scale factor is applied (for
reference only).

The check boxes in the animate column allow you to select the animations to be included in
the synchronization. You can select all or select none of the animations, as well as reverse the
current selection.

Master Animation
One of the animations listed in the Synchronize Window Animation dialog can be selected as
the master animation with which all other animations will be synchronized.
The time scale assigned to the master frame skips steps that are not relevant.
An activated radio button indicates which window contains the master time frame and the
Master check box designates that the master window should be used to synchronize all the
windows in the list.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 351


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Synchronizing Windows
The Synchronize Windows feature allows you to manipulate the view matrix of multiple models
in multiple windows at the same time.
To access the Synchronize Animation:
 Page Controls toolbar > Synchronize Windows icon

Start/Set Synchronization
The Synchronize Windows dialog allows you to set the synchronization settings and begin the
synchronization.

Synchronized Windows dialog

The number of available windows on the current page is represented by colored rectangles
(which are arranged in the same page/window layout), and the active window is also displayed.
By default, all windows are displayed in the current graphics window background color,
indicating that these windows are active for view synchronization. You can click on each of
these rectangles (which represent a page window) to exclude it from the synchronization. The
background color of the window will change to the same color as the dialog for all windows that
are excluded.

352 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Synchronized Windows dialog with three excluded windows

To include a currently excluded window, simply click on the rectangle again (and the
background color will change back to the current graphics window background color).
The Synchronize Windows dialog remains on top until you click OK, or close it. All activated
windows will synchronize the view with the active one. You can now use keyboard shortcuts
and also the 3D view controls to move (rotate, zoom, etc.) the model. Models in the linked
windows will rotate or obey the same view upon applying view actions. If a selected window is a
plot, text, or video window, then it is ignored.
Changes to the window, page, and window layout (for example, adding new windows or pages)
can still be made while the view synchronization is running. If a new page is added using the
add page or cut/copy/paste options, and the synchronized view mode was "on" prior to the
addition, then the new page (and all the windows in that page) will be linked by default - until the
mode is changed or stopped.

Stop Synchronization
Stops the synchronization across all windows/pages.

To stop the view synchronization click on the active Synchronize Windows icon on the
Page Controls toolbar.
Note: No pop-up dialog is associated with this option.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 353


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

8 - Overlaying Images and Videos


The Image Plane tab allows you to select and overlay images (such as company logos,
watermarks, etc.) or videos in the graphics area for correlation and presentation purposes.
Static positioning of these images with the model is available, as well as synchronization of the
videos with HyperView model animations.
Multiple images and videos can be loaded into HyperView, and each of these can be edited in
the Image Plane tab.
It is possible to load static images and video files at the same time (AVI, PNG, BMP, etc.)
interchangeably on the image planes.
The image planes can be 2D or 3D:
o A 2D image plane places the media in the graphics area as a foreground or background
to the models that are loaded.
o A 3D image plane embeds the media in the model space so that when the model view
is rotated or panned, the related media will also change correspondingly. This is
particularly useful for correlating simulation with multiple videos or static images that are
captured with various views.

Example model with 2D and 3D Image Planes

To access the Image Planes:

 Click the Image Planes icon , on the Annotations toolbar


 Results Browser > Model View > Create > Image Plane

354 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Image Plane tab

The width of the entire Image Plane tab can be resized to adjust for the image/video resolution.
To resize the width of the browser, click on the vertical line which separates the tab from the
graphic display area and drag and release the mouse button when the width is the desired size.
You can save, and later restore, the settings of image planes (position and orientation with a
given model) by saving your work session as a Session File.
To enable comparison of multiple sets of simulation results with each other, or against various
physical test data, Report Templates will accept the image/video files as parameters for every
instance of comparison.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 355


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

This is useful for comparing the test and simulation results, as well as comparing across
variants of a design.
In addition, you can use the Apply Style To option to apply a 2D or 3D Image Plane to multiple
windows.
This has the effect of copying the image planes from the source window to all the target
windows that require the image planes.
A background image like a company logo or a test video positioned in one animation window
can be quickly copied to all relevant animation windows using the Apply Style option.
H3D Export is also supported for static images.
All image planes that contain background or foreground, as well as 3D planes, will be
embedded in the H3D file for visual display in HyperView Player.
Only static images are supported at this time.

The main Image Plane tab options and sub-tabs that are available are dependent on the type of
image plane selected:
 2D Image Planes
 3D Image Planes

2D Image Planes
The 2D Image Plane tab is primarily used for displaying static images and videos in the
foreground or background of the graphics window. The image planes can be stacked on top of
each other, or against the model. To accommodate multiple media files in the graphics to be
clearly visible, the 2D image planes can be resized and positioned in the graphics area. Various
image processing filters and transparency settings allow you to adjust the media visibility to
achieve a desired effect.
356 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Select the 2D option from the Type drop-down menu to display the 2D Image Plane tab.

2D Image Plane tab

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 357


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

A Label is then entered which is used to reference the image plane in the Results Browser.
Labels can also be updated using the Rename option on the Results Browser context menu.
Then the file containing the image is selected in the File field.
Many file types are supported including JPEG, TIF, BMP, AVI, and AMF (please refer to the
online help for a full listing of the supported file types).
Once the file is loaded, the image is shown in both the Image Plane tab > Viewing Area and
the graphics area.

The Crop tool allows you to crop an image so that only a desired portion of the media can
be seen in the graphics window. The content that is displayed in the image plane is controlled
by what is cropped. Click the Crop icon to activate the crop tool inside the Image Plane tab
viewing area, and use your mouse to select the crop area (a rectangle which defines what part
of the image you want to keep). The image in the graphics area will be updated immediately
upon release of the mouse button, however the image in the Image Plane tab viewing area will
remain unchanged. Click the Crop icon again to deactivate the Crop tool. Right-clicking on the
Crop icon resets the crop tool and draws the full picture in the image plane.

The other tools in the viewing area include the Zoom tool . This tool allows you to zoom
the image in the Image Plane tab viewing area in or out. Left-click on the Zoom icon to zoom in
on the image, or right-click on the image to zoom out. The current zoom percentage is
displayed to the Zoom field. You can also manually enter a zoom percentage directly into the
Zoom field. The Zoom tool does not have an affect on the image in the graphics area. The size
of the image in the graphics area is controlled by the graphical manipulator. To resize the
image in the graphics area, simply left click on one of the corners of the image and drag the
corner to resize the image.

358 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

There is also a Time Scales tool. Click this button to display the Synchronize Window
Animation dialog, which allows you to synchronize windows that contain animation results in
different units and/or begin at different time steps. Both model and video animations will be
displayed in this dialog. The Time Scales option is only valid for use in the Transient
animation mode.
Sync Mode - The drop-down menu allows you to adjust the scale used to synchronize the video
time scale with the animation by selecting one of the following options:
 Manual - The default setting in which no changes or adjustments are made. The mode
will automatically return to Manual whenever you manually update the scale.
 Length - Adjusts the scale so that the video starts and finishes at the same time as the
animating model.
 Framerate - Adjusts the scale so that the video and model play at the same speed. In
other words, during animation the index of the video frame will correspond with the index
of the animation frame.
Length and Framerate adjustments can be seen in the row of the image plane file and the
column labeled Scaling in the Synchronize Window Animation dialog. The time scales for
the video are automatically adjusted whenever the Sync Mode is changed from Manual to
Length or Framerate, or when switching between the Length and Framerate modes. The
Manual mode simply retains whatever is the last setting of the time scales.
To undo any Sync Mode adjustments, you can manually change the scale or click the Reset
button in the Synchronize Window Animation dialog.
Adjusting the scale of any image plane will have an effect on the overall speed of the animation.
Sync Model - The automatic sync modes of Length and Framerate are dependent on the
animating frames of the model to which they are referenced. If more than one model is present
in the animation window, you can choose the reference model from the Sync Model drop-down
menu. The scales are adjusted based on the number of frames in the selected model to
synchronize the video.
Each image plane has a mode set for synchronization and depending on the mode, a reference
model to sync with. No model reference is available when the Sync Mode is set to Manual. If
a model that is referenced by an image plane is deleted, the Sync Mode will be set back to
Manual.
The Sync Mode and the model to which an image plane is referenced, Sync Model, are rightly
propagated when the information is copied to other windows in a session using the Apply Style
or Copy/Paste operations.

At the bottom of the Image Plane tab there are additional sub-tabs available.
For 2D Image Planes, these tools include Anchor, Display Options, Z-Stack, and Filter.

Anchor allows you to select or change the location of the image plane relative to the graphics
area. The options available are listed below:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 359


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

The Reset option will return the image/video in the graphics area to the state when it was
originally loaded.
In addition to the Anchor tools, the graphical manipulator can be used to reposition the
image/video. In the lower left corner of the image there is a 2D manipulator (shown above in
the Altair image). Each arrow can be freely dragged along a straight line. The entire
rectangular area will be translated accordingly, while its size and shape will remain the same.
The square handle can also be dragged on the plane of the area to reposition the rectangular
area for any in-plane movements.

The Display Options sub-tab allows you to control how the image or video is displayed on the
image plane and in the graphics area. There are four options available.

When Maintain aspect ratio is activated the aspect ratio of the image will be maintained while
the image is being manipulated by the graphical manipulator. When Stretch is activated, the
image will be stretched to fill the graphics area. Backface visibility is only available for 3D
Image Planes. Transparency allows you to control the transparency of the image plane using
the slider bar. This is particularly useful for applying watermarks onto the graphics area, as well
as controlling the visibility of the stacked images.

The Z-Stack sub-tab is used to control the stacking order of all of the image planes and the
model. The arrows located on the right side of the dialog can be used to move the items up and
down the list. The item at the top of the list will be placed on the foreground with the other items
360 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

are placed in the background (based on their order in the list). The analysis model loaded is
represented by <<MODEL>> in the list. Other image planes are listed with their Label.

The final sub-tab is Filter. This sub-tab contains tools allowing for certain colors can be filtered
out, and the media can be enhanced by applying the appropriate filters and pixel mapping
algorithms. Please refer to the online help for a complete listing of the available features in this
sub-tab.

Above, the options have been set so that the color white is removed from the image.
This makes the Altair logo appear to have a transparent background. In order to remove all of
the color white, the Type has been set to ColorAlpha, the Pixel mapping has been set to
Linear2, the Mode has been set to GreaterThan, and the Color white has been selected.
This just leaves the lighter grey surrounding the letters and removes the white from the image:

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 361


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

3D Image Planes
The 3D Image Plane panel is primarily used for positioning the static images and videos in the
model space.
A 3D image plane embeds the media in the model space so that when the model view is rotated
or panned, the related media will also change correspondingly.
This is particularly useful for correlating simulation with multiple videos or static images that are
captured with various views, as in correlating a crash test video or a drop test captured from
different angles.
Each of the views can be positioned with respect to the model in 3D space such that the view of
the model is tied to an image plane for best correlation.
The 3D image planes that are embedded in model space can be incrementally adjusted to
match the model dimensions.
In addition to using the 2 Point and 3 Point alignment modes for scaling the image planes to
the model size, the image planes now allow minor adjustments to the rectangular plane by the
sizing manipulators available on the periphery.
This helps in making small size adjustments without necessarily going through picking
alignment and scaling points again.
Small changes to plane orientations can of course be adjusted by the tripod manipulator
attached to the image planes.
Also, once the scaling and view alignment of the 3D image plane is accomplished, the plane
can be moved in or out of the model to match with any section cut views.
As the 3D image plane is scaled in the model space, the measurements applied on the model
are valid for the media as well, and are thus no longer dependent on the accuracy of picking
points based on the pixel resolution.
This provides a close to accurate measurement in film analysis tasks.
With appropriate image processing filters, a good correlation (or the lack thereof) can be
determined easily with 3D planes.
In addition, an image plane can be tied to a model, so that any tracking system based
deformations are considered on the media as well.
The tracking mode is extended to reference points on the video as well, so that the image
plane's relative position to the model is maintained.
See the Model tab section (below) for additional details.
Select the 3D option from the Type drop-down menu to display the 3D Image Plane tab.
Many of the options available when for 2D image planes are also available for 3D image
planes.
When the Type is set to 3D, additional options are added.
There is a new sub-tab named Alignment that is added. Here the inputs required for scaling
and aligning of the image plane with respect to the model are entered. The available options
allow you to align the image plane in 3D space with respect to the models. The alignment uses
a simple two or three point input scheme for scaling the image plane to the model size and
orienting it in the appropriate view.
362 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

3D Image Plane tab

For example, to align a video file and a model file of a crash event, you might choose to select
the center point of two tires to align the two.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 363


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

First the Alignment mode would be set to 2 Point, and then the appropriate Plane would be
selected to align the model and video in. Then the two reference points for the model (N1 and
N2) would be selected and then the two reference points for the video file (IN1 and IN2) would
be selected.
Within the Display Options sub-tab, the Backface visibility option is available. When this
option is activated the backside of image plane regardless of the image plane orientation is always
shown. Also, the Cull angle option is added. This option allows you to adjust the fading of the
image (using the slider bar). The combination of settings within the Transparency, Backface
visibility, and Cull angle options allow you to effectively control the manner in which the media
is displayed on the image plane (with model rotations and pan) without obscuring important
details.

The final sub-tab added is the Model sub-tab. This allows you to associate an image plane with
a tracking system. This option is only applicable if a tracking system has already been added to
a model. When a model is selected the tracking behavior of any associated model based
tracking systems will be applied to the image plane. This is useful for studying the deformation
motion with the tracking system applied (provided that there is no out of plane rotation in the
video).

364 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Also with the 3D image plane is the 3D graphical manipulator.


The 3D manipulator allows you to make incremental adjustments to the rotating plane or move
the image plane in 3-D space.

This manipulator is created based upon the nodes specified using the 2 Point node input
collector (N1N2 and IN1IN2) or the 3 Point node input collector (N1N2N3 and IN1IN2IN3).
Each arrow can be freely dragged along a straight line. The arc handle connecting arrows
can also be grabbed to allow rotation of the arrows and the image plane. In addition, the
square handles connecting arrows can be freely dragged in space for planar translations to
modify the location of the image plane.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 365


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

9 - Exporting a Deformed Shape


The Export Deformed Shape feature allows you to export the deformed shape as follows:
 Abaqus
 DynaKey
 OptiStruct Analysis/Nastran
 RADIOSS
 STL
These files can be read into a pre-processor, such as HyperMesh, or into a CAD tool to view the
deformed geometry.
To access the Export Deformed Shape:
 Menu bar File > Export > Solver Deck

This utility writes out unscaled coordinated only. If scaled coordinates are needed, use the
Linear Superposition utility to create a subcase, and then use this utility to export the
deformed shape (with scaled coordinates).

366 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

10 - Crash Tools for Plotting


This section will cover the Vehicle Safety Tools available in HyperGraph 2D as well as some of
the basic information for creating a bar chart. These are two common plotting tools that are
used for post processing crash results.

10.1 - Vehicle Safety Tools


The Vehicle Safety Tools (VST) is a collection of over 200 macros, Templex functions, and
external functions for use by a vehicle safety engineer. The toolkit contains many basic curve
operations, current injury assessment mechanisms, and several additional data transformation
features. After opening the VST file, seven new menus that contain the macros and functions
are displayed: Math, Filter, Units, Injury, Misc, Transforms, and Safety Tools.
To load the Vehicle Safety Tools

 File > Load > Preference File from the menu bar. Then within the Preferences dialog,
select Vehicle Safety Tools and click Load.

The VST macros and functions can also be accessed from the Macro list on the Plot Macros

panel in addition to the menu bar.


The parameters associated with the selected macro or function are displayed in the Parameters
list. Before executing some macros and functions, you may need to enter additional parameter
information. When you execute a plot macro or function by clicking Apply, the macro or
function uses the parameters to create curves and notes within the session. Undo reverses the
implementation of the plot macro.
See Plot Macros for more information on working with macros.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 367


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Below is a brief description of each menu. For a full description of the menu items, please refer
to the online help.

Math Menu
The vehicle safety tools' Math menu allows you to perform basic math operations on one, two,
or three curves at a time. The operations include curve addition and multiplication and
resultants, for example. The start, end, or sample frequency of the various curves is not an
issue - the VST automatically crops and samples the input curves as needed. The curves must
be using the same units, in most cases.
The Math menu contains three secondary menus: one curve, two curves, and three curves.

Filter Menu
The vehicle safety tools' Filter menu provides curve filtering functions, including Butterworth,
FIR, and a new SAE 1995 that are not available to regular HyperGraph 2D users. Filtering
requires the time unit of seconds. You must convert your data to seconds before applying a
filter.

Units Menu
The vehicle safety tools' Units menu allows you to convert to/from common unit sets. It is often
necessary to convert data when comparing disparate sources (for example test vs CAE). This
menu provides a simple and fast way to convert one or many data curves simultaneously. All
conversion constants are displayed for you to review before applying the conversion.
The Units menu contains secondary menus. From each menu, you can convert various units of
measure.

Injury Menu
The vehicle safety tools' Injury menu offers calculations for all known injury assessment tools.
Each of the assessments may be used to generate either a note or a curve at your discretion.
The assessments clearly indicate the required units for input data. If your data does not match
the required input, you can use the Units menu to convert the data or, optionally, supply
conversion factors directly to the input.

Misc Menu
The vehicle safety tools' Misc menu provides some functions that are not commonly used. For
example, you can simulate a bar chart or histogram using this menu.

Transforms Menu
The vehicle safety tools' Transforms menu provides several functions to calculate running
statistics, regressions, FFTs, etc.
368 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

10.2 - Bar Charts


The Bar Chart toolbar is displayed when you select HyperGraph 2D from the application menu

and the active window is set to the Bar Chart mode, .

Select an application from the menu

Plot type options

Most of the panels available for plotting bar charts are similar to the ones available for XY
plotting, although there are a few differences.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 369


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Define Curves

The Define Curves panel allows you to edit existing bar charts individually and add new
bar charts to the current plot. The panel also provides access to the application's curve
calculator.

Define Bars panel with values as a data source enabled

The curve list displays the names of all the bar charts in the active window.
The Cut, Copy, Paste, and Add buttons under the bar chart list are used to maintain the bar
chart list for the active window. Bar charts can be copied and pasted into other bar chart
windows or within the current bar chart window. Bar charts can be also be added and deleted
from the list, and they can be renamed.
Individual bar charts can be turned on or off. To turn a bar chart off, select the bar chart from
the window and deactivate the Series check box next to the bar chart name. To turn a bar chart
on that was turned off, activate the Series check box.

Data Sources
Bar charts are comprised of data and categories. Data can be read from an external file,
defined as a mathematical expression, or entered as values. A label identifies categories and
tic marks are used to separate them from other categories. If there are more data points than
there are categories, the application adds blank categories to accommodate the extra data
points.
If Values is selected as the source (as shown above), the Values table is displayed, allowing
you to directly enter data point values.
The bar chart display is divided into Categories. Categories can be renamed by selecting a cell,
typing a new name, and clicking Apply.
You can have more than one bar series in each category. Data point values can be entered
directly into the Curve column in the Values table. Enter numbers in the Curve columns and
click Apply.
After adding a curve to the Curve list, a Curve column is displayed next to the Categories
column.
By default, a new curve is named Curve 1, Curve 2 etc. If you change the name of the bar chart
curve in the Curve list, the heading for the Curve column in the Values table also changes.

370 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

10.3 - Collision Detection


The Collision Detection panel can be used to perform collision interference checking. It allows
you to define a collision set, select components (parts) in the collision set, and then detect
penetration between two groups. The ability to define multiple collision sets allows you to
quickly perform design reviews.
To access the Collision Detection panel:

 Tools toolbar > Collision Detection


 Tools > Collision Detection from the menu bar.

The options within the panel allow you to add collision sets and define the properties of each set
individually.

Collision Sets
The collision sets defined for the current model are listed in the Collision Sets list. You can
add or delete collision sets using the Add and Delete buttons. You can also select multiple
collision sets and click the Delete button, in order to delete the selected collision sets from the
list.
Keyboard shortcuts are also available for selecting items within the list:
Press the SHIFT or CTRL key on the keyboard + the left mouse button to select multiple items
from the list.
Press the CTRL + A keys on the keyboard to select all items in the list.
Press the DELETE key on the keyboard to delete the selected collision set(s).
A collision set is activated, or deactivated, using the radio button.
In addition, you can access the following options by right-clicking anywhere within the Collision
Sets list:
 Delete - Deletes the selected collision set(s) from the list.
 Rename - Displays the Rename dialog, which allows you to rename the selected
collision set.
 Make Current - Allows you to select which collision set will be activated and displayed in
the graphics window. This option performs the same action as clicking the radio button
"on" next to a collision set.
You can sort the items in the Collision Sets list by clicking on the list heading.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 371


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Activating the Clear Collision Detection option clears the contour for the collision detection
results, and deactivates all of the collision sets listed.
Each collision set is defined by two groups, A and B. A group can contain more than one
component.

Selection
The Components input collector allows you to select the components that you want to add to the
existing groups. Once the components are selected, click the appropriate Add to Group button
to add the component to a specific group.
Once a Collision Set is added, Components are selected and added to either Group A or
Group B. The components in each group will be listed in the tree structure to the right of the
Selection. Individual components in each group can be deleted from this tree.
 Delete - Allows you to delete selected components, which are displayed in the groups
list box, from a group.

Proximity
Check Enable proximity checking to allow the objects to be detected at the distance specified
in the Minimum Distance field. For example, if you enter 10 for Minimum Distance, the objects
are considered to be in the proximity when they are within 10 units of each other. Objects that
are detected to be within a defined proximity will be displayed in the color yellow.
If Enable proximity checking is unchecked, the objects will collide at their actual collision point
and will be displayed in the color red.

Show result by
 Elements - Contours the results using elements. The color display will show on all
violated elements.
 Components - Contours the results using components. The color display will show on
all violated components as a solid color.
 Apply is selected to apply the selected settings.

Once the Collision Set has been defined, the collision can be animated using the Start/Pause
Animation button on the Animation toolbar.

Animation event
These options allow you to define how the objects animate with respect to the collision point.
Ignore Collisions - Continuous animation, which ignores the collision point.
Stop on Collision – Animation stops when a collision is detected
Stop on Proximity Violation - Animation stops when a defined proximity violation is detected.

372 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Summary…
It saves a summary file containing each node that collided at each time frame. This summary
helps you to determine which components failed the check.
Below are three images illustrating the Collision Set which has been defined with Group A
being the cab of the truck and Group B being the bed of the truck.
The first image represents the two components before a collision has been detected; notice that
both components are blue.
The second image is when there is a collision between the two components and the results are
being shown by Components. Notice how both components are colored red.
The third image is at the same timestep as image two where a collision has been detected, but
the results are shown based on the Elements.
In this image, only the elements that colliding are colored red and the rest are blue.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 373


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Exercise 6a - Post Processing Crash Analysis Results


This exercise uses the files truck.key and d3plot as the model and result file.

Step 1: Load the truck.key and d3plot file.


1. Set the Load model file to …\Model-files\6a-truck\truck.key.
2. Set the Load result file to …\Model-files\6a-truck\d3plot.
3. Click Apply to import the model and result file.

Step 2: Use the Results Browser to create a contour plot and set the current time
step.
1. In the Results Browser, expand the Results >Vector > Displacement folders.
2. Select the icon to the left of Mag to contour the model with the Displacement Magnitude
result.
3. From the Time step drop down, select Time = 0.009997.
This sets the current time step to 0.009997.

Step 3: Use the Results Browser to Create a Section Cut.


1. From the Results Browser > Model View, right click and select Create > Section Cut.
This will create a new Section Cut and will open the Section Cut properties in the Entity
Editor section. By default, a Section Cut is created that is normal to the Y-Axis.

374 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 375


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

2. From the Results Browser > Model View, select Section1, right click and select Show
Manipulator.

Drag the manipulator along Y axis to change the section Position and Base plane.

3. Under Display options, change the Cross Section Width of the Cross Section using the
scroll bar to the right.

376 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

4. Hide Displacement (Mag) contour using Result Browser > Result View. Set on the
Display > Cross Section Only option and set on the Display > Feature Lines.

5. Set on the Display > Transparency option.

6. Within the Results Browser > Model View, expand the Section Cuts folder.

7. Turn on/off the display of the grid by selecting next to Section 1 or from the Entity
Editor > Display > Grid (uncheck the flag)

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 377


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

8. Turn off the display of the Section Cut by selecting next to Section 1 or from the Entity
Editor > Standard > Visibility (uncheck the flag)

Step 4: Use the Measure panel to create a Measure Group for the Distance
Between two nodes.
1. From the Results Browser > Model View, right click and select Create > Measure.
This will create a new Measure and will open the Measure properties in the Entity
Editor section. By default, a Section Cut is created that is normal to the Y-Axis.

378 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

2. Under Standard options, set the Type > Distance Between.


This option will measure the distance between two selected nodes.
3. With the Standard > Entity IDs > Nodes entity selector active, select any node on the
bumper of the truck and then any node on the hood of the truck.
This measures and displays the distance between the two nodes at the current timestep.
4. Uncheck the Global > Transparency option to better view the node ids and reported
measure.

5. Go to Standard > Items > Select… and click on click Create Curves….
This opens the Create Curves dialog where you can set the parameters for a curve.
6. Select Live Link, for Y Axis select Magnitude and for Place on select New Plot.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 379


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

7. Click OK.
This creates a second window with a new plot that represents the distance between the two
selected nodes over the simulation time.

8. Select the Start/Pause Animation button ( ) to update the Measure Group Curve.
9. Click Start/Pause Animation again to stop the animation.

Step 5: Use the Vector panel to create a vector plot on the right rear wheel.
1. In the Results Browser, expand the Results >Vector > Displacement folders.
2. Select the icon to the left of Mag to contour the model with the Displacement Magnitude
result.

Within the Results toolbar, select Vector to enter the Vector panel.
2. Within the Vector panel, make sure that Result type is set to Displacement.
3. For Selection, select Components.
4. In the graphics area, select the right rear tire on the truck.
5. Check the box for Overlay result display (on the right side of the panel).

6. Click Apply.

380 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

7. Under Display tab, set Size scaling to Uniform.


Notice how the display of the vectors are updated and all the vectors are displayed with the
same size.
8. Under Display tab, set Color by: to Direction.
Now the vectors are displayed with their X, Y, and Z components.
9. Click Clear Vector to remove the vector plot from the graphics area.

Step 6: Use the Results Browser to create a new Tracking System.


1. From the Results Browser > Model View, right click and select Create > Tracking
System.

This opens the Tracking panel with a new Tracking System added.
2. Click on Tracking System 1 in the Tracking Systems list.
3. For Track, select Node.
4. With N1 active, select a node on the top of the truck cab.

5. Select the Start/Pause Animation button ( ) to animate the simulation using the tracking
system.
Notice how the model deforms with respect to the node selected.
6. Click Start/Pause Animation again to stop the animation.
7. To remove the tracking system, under the Tracking Systems list select Clear Tracking
System.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 381


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Step 7: Use the Tracing panel to create a tracing plot on the right two wheel.

1. Within the Annotations toolbar, select Tracing to enter the Tracing panel.
2. Under Trace, select the Component radio button.
3. For Component select the right front tire and the right rear tire.

Notice under Tracing mode, From first step is the default setting. This means that the
trace is displayed from the first time step to the current time step.

4. Select the Start/Pause Animation button ( ) to animate the simulation and view the
trace.
5. For the Tracing mode, select All steps.
This displays the trace through the entire simulation

6. For the Tracing mode, select Last and set steps to 5.


This displays the trace for only the last 5 steps.

7. Select Delete twice to remove the trace for both tires.


8. Under Trace, select the Node radio button.
382 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

9. With the Node selector active, select a node on the top side of the right rear tire.
10. Leave Tracing mode left to Last and for the Display options, set the Color to black and
the Thickness to 5.

11. Set the Tracing mode to All steps.

Notice how the node path is traced.


12. Click Delete to remove the trace.

Step 8: Use the Exploded View panel to create an automatic and custom
explosion.

1. Within the Results toolbar, select Exploded View to enter the Exploded View panel.
2. Press F on the keyboard to fit the model to the graphics area.
3. Click Automatic Explosion in the Explosions List.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 383


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

4. Select the Start/Pause Animation button ( ) to animate with the automatic explosion.
5. Stop the animation.
6. Click Add to create a custom explosion.
7. Click on Components and select By ID.
8. Enter 8 into the field and then click Add.

Notice that there is a message stating “1 entities selected”.


9. Click Return.
This adds the component with the ID of 8 to the selection. This component is the ENGINE-
GEARBOX component.
10. Set the Mode to Translate.
11. Under Translate, for Direction select Z-Axis and for Distance enter 100.
This will translate the component 100 model units in the Z-direction each time the + or –
buttons are selected.
12. Click + multiple times to move the component away from the truck.

13. Select the Start/Pause Animation button ( ) to animate with the custom explosion.
14. Stop the animation.
15. Click Clear Explosion to reset the display.

384 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Exercise 6b - Synchronize Animation and Video Overlay


This exercise uses the file explorer.h3d as the model and result file.

Step 1: Load the explorer.h3d and the


2006_Ford_Explorer_crash_test.avi files.
1. Within an animation window, select File > Open > Model from the menu bar.
2. Set both the Load model and Load result file to
…\Model-files\6b-video\explorer.h3d.
3. Click Apply to import the model and result file.

4. Change the window layout to a 2 window layout, .

5. Set the second window to the MediaView application, .


6. From the menu bar, select File > Open > Media to load a file into the MediaView window.
7. Select the file
…\Model-files\6b-video\2006_Ford_Explorer_crash_test.avi

Step 2: Use the Synchronize Animation tool to synchronize the two windows.

1. Click in the animation window and then select the XZ Right Plane View, .

2. Select Start/Pause Animation to begin animating the session.


Notice how the animation and the video file are not synchronized.
3. Stop the animation.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 385


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

4. From the menu bar select Tools > Synchronize Animation to launch the Synchronize
Window Animation tool.

5. Move the Synchronize Window Animation window so that you can view both of the
windows but still work within the Synchronize Window Animation tool.
6. Set the Synchronize animation by to Using the slider bar.
7. Use the slider bar to adjust the Current time being displayed in the session.
In the next few steps, we will sets two times in each window to synchronize the two
windows. To do this, we pick two events that occur in each window and set the Time A and
Time B for each window. In this example, Time A will correspond to when the bumper hits
the wall and Time B will correspond to when the tire hits the wall. By defining these two
points, we can synchronize the two windows.
8. Adjust the slider bar to the time where the bumper in the animation window hits the wall
(around 0.005 seconds).

9. Click on the lock button, , for Window 1 under the Time A column.
10. Adjust the slider bar to the time where the tire hits the wall in the animation window (around
0.045 seconds) and then click on the lock button for Window 1 under the Time B column.
11. Adjust the slider bar to the time where the bumper hits the wall in the media window (around
22 seconds) and then click on the lock button for Window 2 under the Time A column.
12. Adjust the slider bar to the time where the tire hits the wall in the media window (around 57
seconds) and then click on the lock button for Window 2 under the Time B column.
By setting these times for each window, a Scaling and Offset value are calculated for each
window so that the animation and video files are synchronized.

386 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

13. Click Apply.

14. Select Start/Pause Animation to begin animating the session.


Notice how the animation and the video file are now synchronized.
15. Stop the animation.

Step 3: Add a new page and load the explorer.h3d file.

1. Add a new page to the session by selecting Add Page, .


2. Set the application to HyperView.
3. Within an animation window, select File > Open > Model from the menu bar.
4. Set both the Load model and Load result file to
…\Model-files\6b-video\explorer.h3d
5. Click Apply to import the model and result file.

Step 4: Create a 2D Image Plane.

1. Select the Image Plane panel from the toolbar.


2. Set the Type: to 2D.
3. Enter Altair for the Label.
4. Click on the Open File icon next to File and select the file Altair-logo.bmp.

This imports the file Altair-logo.bmp into the animation window. Notice the size of the
image in the animation window.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 387


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

5. To resize the image, click on any of the corners and drag to the new desired location.
Resize the image, using manipulator axis, as shown below:

6. To move the image, use the graphical manipulator in the lower left corner of the image.
Click on the horizontal axis to move the image horizontally, and click on the vertical axis to
move vertically. Center the image in the graphics window as shown below:

You can also place the image at the center of the animation window by clicking on the

388 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Anchor tab in the Image Plane panel and selecting the Center icon, .

7. Notice how the image cannot be seen because it lies under the animation. To bring the
image to the front, click on the Z-Stack tab in the Image Plane panel and with the image

label (Altair) highlighted, click the up arrow, .

8. Click on the Filter tab. Using this tab the color white will be removed from the image so that
is has a transparent background.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 389


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

Set the Type to ColorAlpha, the Pixel mapping to Linear2, and the Mode to Greaterthan.
Click on the Color option and using the arrow to the right, click on the color just below white
(see image below). These settings remove the color white from the image.

9. Select Close in the Image Plane panel to close the panel.

10. Animate the model. Notice how the model animates with the image placed on top of the
model.

11. Stop the animation.

Step 5: Import a video as a 3D object and animate with model


1. In the Results Browser > Model View, expand the folder Image Planes.

390 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

2. Turn off the display of the image plane already created by right clicking on Altair and

selecting Hide or just click on .


3. Right click in the Results Browser > Model View and select Create > Image Plane.
4. Set the Type: to 3D.
5. Enter Explorer Video for the Label.
6. Click on the Open File icon next to File and select the file
2006_Ford_Explorer_crash_test.avi.

7. Select the XZ Right Plane View to align the h3d model and the avi file in the same
plane.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 391


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

8. In the Image Plane panel, verify you are in the Alignment tab.

This tab will be used to align the model in the video file to the model file.

9. Set the Alignment Mode to 2 Point.

10. Set the Plane to XZ Right .

11. The first set of reference nodes to be selected are the h3d model’s nodes. Click the green
N1 selector to make it active and then select the center point of the left tire in the animation
window.

12. Next activate the blue N2 selector and then select the center point of the right tire in the
animation window.

When the two points have been selected, an arrow will be displayed going from N1 to N2.

13. Next the same two points need to be selected as reference nodes in the video. Click the
yellow N1 selector to make it active and then select the center point on the left wheel of the
image preview in the Image Plane panel.

14. Next click the yellow N2 selector to make it active and then select the center point on the
right wheel.

392 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

15. Click Align to align the two images.

16. Click Close to close the Image Plane panel.

17. Animate the model and rotate the images in the animation window. Notice how the video
can be graphically manipulated in 3-dimensions as well as animated with the h3d file.

HyperWorks 13.0 HyperView Introduction 393


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 6: Crashworthiness

394 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Chapter 7

Publishing Results and Advanced


Topics
Once you have reviewed your results, it is important to be able to generate a report. All
HyperWorks Desktop applications provide several utilities that allow you to generate HTML’s,
PowerPoint slides, pictures or avi’s that help you to enhance the report or send them over to
others for further review. This chapter highlights the tools available in HyperWorks Desktop that
can be used to achieve this goal. Also included in this chapter are some advanced topics.
The topics to be covered in this chapter include
 Result Presentation
 HyperView Player
 HvTrans
 Report Templates

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 395


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

1 - Result Presentation
Within HyperView, there are tools available for capturing screen contents and animations to
files. There is also a utility to create HTML and PowerPoint (XML) report files from HyperView.

1.1 - Capturing Images/Videos


In order to capture the screen content and animations, the Image Capture toolbar is used. This
toolbar is accessed by selecting View > Toolbars > HyperWorks > Image Capture from the
menu bar.

Save Image to File/Clipboard : Saves the current image to a file or a clipboard for
subsequent pasting

Capture Graphics Area : Captures the graphics area and either saves to a file or to the
clipboard

Capture Panel Area : Captures the panel area and either saves to a file or to the clipboard

Capture Dynamic Rectangle : Use the mouse to select a rectangular area to capture as
an image

Capture Frame Area : Use the mouse to select a frame area to capture as the image

Capture Graphics Area Video : HyperWorks Desktop allows you to capture animation
data to an AVI, AMF (Altair Movie File), BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or PNG file. You can view the AVI
file in a movie player application and in HyperView’s video window.

Capture Dynamic Rectangular Video : This works the same as the Capture Graphics
Area Video function, but after entering the file name, you must graphically select a rectangular
area where the video will be recorded. Use the left mouse button to draw the window and then
click the right mouse button to accept the area.

396 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

1.2 - Publish to HTML or PowerPoint


Also in HyperWorks Desktop there is the ability to export the session to a HTML or PowerPoint
file.
This is done from the File menu, selecting Publish > HTML, PowerPoint, Legacy
(PowerPointBeta, PowerPoint 2003 or PowerPoint 2007).
• The HyperWorks Desktop PowerPoint Publishing feature reduces the effort needed to
generate and update Microsoft PowerPoint (PPT) presentations from HWD sessions,
establishing a live link or connection (using a PowerPoint add-in) between HWD and
PowerPoint. Support of Windows & Linux
• Changes made in the PowerPoint PPT presentation are preserved when new runs are
post-processed after updating your session; full support of report templates are provided.
The PowerPoint layout can be defined the first time you publish using PowerPoint
master templates.
• Dynamic linking of HyperGraph notes with PowerPoint (text fields updated with new
results).

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 397


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

PowerPoint Publishing Basic Work Flow


1. Preferences > Export Settings > PPT Options menu, select PPT Options
• select master template and export options
2. Session Browser > Publish column
• select the pages from your session that you want to export.

3. File > Publish > PowerPoint > New PPT or

398 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

• Switch views in PPT to verify connections


o Easy handling with PPT plug-in
• Tag Table (HWD) & Tag Summary (PPT)
o Object preview and format change in HWD
o Verify connection to HWD objects in PPT
• PPT Export Options
o PPT master template support
o Predefined image positioning at first export

4. File > Publish > PowerPoint > Opened PPT


• If you make changes to your HyperWorks Desktop session, you can transfer those edits
to an open or existing PowerPoint presentation.
• Click Synchronize to update existing PowerPoint slides with the images and KPI's that
have been changed in your session
• Click Synchronize when Publishing to add new pages to PowerPoint and also
synchronizes images, animations, and headers in the previously created PowerPoint
pages
• From the Altair add-in toolbar, select Sync Live; the changes from your HyperWorks
Desktop session are synchronized to the PowerPoint file.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 399


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

400 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

5. File > Save As to save your HyperWorks Desktop session to a session file or report
template for later use.

PowerPoint Publishing

• File > Publish > HTML, PowerPoint, Legacy


• Standard toolbar > PPT menu, select Publish to PowerPoint or HTML.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 401


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Export Settings
• Preferences menu bar > Export Settings > AMF, AVI, H3D, JPEG, GIF, PPT options.

402 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

2 - Report Templates
While post processing, it is common to do the same steps repeatedly for different iterations or
runs of your model. This allows you to better study the results with respect to one another.
Report templates are ASCII text files that contain statements for creating reports. Report
templates are similar to session files except they contain parameters which hold string or
numeric data. Report parameters are specified in the Reports panel.
The most common use for a parameter in a report definition is to hold the filename of a data file
which is read when the report is generated.
A report can have any number of parameters. There are four types of parameters:
• Filename
• String
• Integer
• Double
Parameters can also hold filter frequencies, scale factors and annotation text.
The Report Template capability available in HyperWorks Desktop allows you to generate
templates with one file and allows you to perform the same operation for other iterations, thus
preventing the need to repeat all the steps again.
This section shows you how to generate report templates and use the appropriate utilities to
automate your post processing.
In this section, you will learn how to:
 Accessing the Reports Panel
 Use the Parameter Browser for report template creation and parameterization
 Overlay and append plot, animation, and video data with report templates
 Display and hide layers of data in plot windows

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 403


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

2.1 - Template and Flexible Reports

• File > Save As > Report Template  Save the template as .tpl

• File > Open > Report Template  Open the template .tpl in the Flexible Report
Templates dialog box.

• Easy-to-use report panel & reports more flexible


• Easier comparison of test and simulation
• Better handling of missing files and channels
• Check and reconnect missing channels (Type, Requests, Components) in GUI
• Skip all channels referring to a file loading a report template
• Save & reuse configurations
• More user-friendly color and style settings

404 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

2.2 - Report Templates Toolbar


The Reports panel is accessed through the Reports toolbar. To turn on the display of the
Reports toolbar select View > Toolbars > HyperWorks > Report.

Open Report Template – opens a report template file

Save As Report Template – saves the current session as a report template

Open Reports Panel – opens the Reports panel


• While post processing, it is common to do the same steps repeatedly for different
iterations or runs of your model.
• This allows you to better study the results with respect to one another.
• Report Template:
• Generate templates with one file that allows you to perform the same operation
for other iterations
• Prevents the need to repeat all the same steps
• This section covers:
• Accessing the Reports Panel
• Use the Parameter Browser for report template creation and parameterization
• Overlay and append plot, animation and video data with report templates
• Display and hide layers of data in plot windows
HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 405
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

The Reports panel allows you to add (append, replace, or overlay) predefined page sets in
report templates to the current HyperWorks Desktop session. A report template automates the
processing of different sets of similar data. Report templates contain a list of report parameters.

• Append - Contents added to the session end.

• Replace - Current replaced with new session. The report definition names must match

• If they don’t match, the report is appended to the end of the session.

• Overlay - Report animations and plots are combined in the current session

• Autofit Plots - locks the axis of the current plot so that it does not change as new
plots are overlaid

• Auto place notes - automatically place notes

• Use report colors - line colors, line styles, symbol colors, and symbol styles
based on the report template

• Display and Hide Layers

• Each time a report template is applied to the session, it is saved as a layer

• Layers - button on Reports panel controls the display of each layer

• Layers can be deleted or renamed using the right click context menu

406 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Once a report template is loaded, the parameters are updated and the appropriate files are
selected. The next topic discusses how to create parameters using the Parameter Browser.

2.3 - Parameter Browser


The Parameter Browser (used with Report Templates) allows you to parameterize almost
everything in a session file or report template and automate repeatable processes of generating
entire analysis sessions in HyperWorks Desktop.
The reality of automation is that it's not always desirable to re-apply automation scripts exactly
as they were originally defined.
To remedy this, the Parameter Browser includes a graphical user interface for defining
parameters that can be changed when an automation script is executed.
After the parameters are defined, you can save the automation script and run it from the
Reports panel.
The Parameter Browser displays all windows and pages in the current session, including the
attributes assigned to each entity.
Under each entity is a list of the entity's attributes.
Activating the checkbox next to any attribute includes the attribute as a parameter in the
parameter table (located in the lower half of the browser), which is defined or kept in its default
state when the process is re-run.
To display the browser, click View > Browsers > HyperWorks > Parameters.
Within the Parameter Browser there are three sections to the browser; the attributes listing, the
available parameters for the selected attribute, the selected parameters and their values:

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 407


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

The listed attributes are based on the features in the current session.
Selecting one of the attributes will populate the available parameters.

408 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

3 – HyperWorks Tools
3.1- HyperView Player
HyperView Player is a stand-alone 3-D viewer that includes web browser plug-ins for PC and
UNIX which allows users to share CAE models and simulation results via the Internet.
• HyperView Player provides a collaborative solution for enterprise-wide product data
visualization throughout your design and development process.
• HyperView Player enables you (or your customers) to display, manipulate, and review a
single 3-D result type from Altair's compact H3D file.
• HyperView Player can be inserted as an object into a HTML/PowerPoint/Word
presentation, or into a web page, making it the ideal solution for communicating
analytical results effectively among analysts, testing engineers, tool and die makers,
product design engineers, and product managers.  Drag/Drop file into desired
location or use Insert option with these programs.
• HyperView Player also allows professionals in sales, marketing, finance, publications,
engineering, and support to create information multimedia presentations,
documents, proposals, project reports, and web pages.

• To export H3D from HyperView, File > Export > Model


• Export only data you want someone to access using Preferences > Export
Settings

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 409


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

HyperView Player - Toolbars

• Standard

• Animation

• View Control

• Display Control

• Help Control

410 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

HyperView Player – Section Cut Graphical Manipulators

Section Cut Graphical Manipulators allow you to modify the definition of section cuts, as well
as translate or rotate sections anywhere in 3-D space.
• Two Directional Manipulator - available for X-Axis, Y-Axis, Z-Axis section cuts only.

• Three Directional Manipulator - available for N1,N2,N3 and section cuts. It allow free
rotations and translations in a 3-D space for relocating and reorienting cross sections.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 411


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

HyperView Player – Context Menu

It provides quick access to various toolbar and display functions. Use the right mouse button in
the graphics area to invoke the Context Menu.
• Use the right mouse button in the graphics area to invoke the Context Menu.

412 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

3.2 - HvTrans
It is general practice to delete your result files on completion of your project as they tend to be
big in size. The HvTrans utility is a result translator available along with the HyperWorks suite
that allows you to translate the result file to H3D format that is Altair proprietary and a
compressed format. The utility allows you to compress the data and also pick and choose
results and their components that are of interest to you.
This utility is different from creating a H3D file from within HyperView because it allows you to
select the subcase, simulation, results, compression information, and model file to be contained
in the H3D file. The H3D file created from HyperView only contains the currently displayed
information within HyperView.
This chapter guides you on how to use HvTrans to translate and compress your results to the
H3D format.

To open the HvTrans GUI:


 On Windows:
From the Start menu > Programs > Altair HyperWorks 13.0 > Tools > HvTrans
 On UNIX:
Run the script [HyperWorks install directory]/altair/scripts/hvtrans.
To begin using HvTrans, you must first open a result file. When you load a result file, the
HvTrans dialog displays the same result information displayed in the HyperView Animation
window. The following file types are supported for result translation:
ABAQUS ODB File (*.odb)
ANSYS Result (*.rth, *.rst, *rmg)
CFD Ensight File (*.encas, *.case)
DYNA DB File (*.db)
FEMZIP DSY (*dsy)
FEMZIP d3plot File (*d3plot*)
Hyper3D File (*.h3d)
HyperMesh Result File (*.res)
LS-DYNA d3plot File (*d3plot, *.ptf)
MARC File (*.t16)
Moldflow Result File (*.udm)
NASTRAN/OptiStruct OP2 File (*.op2)
Nike3D n3plot File (*n3plot)
PAM-CRASH DSY File (*.dsy)
RADIOSS Result File (*A001)
UNV File (*.unv)

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 413


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

HvTrans allows you to extract or translate results into an H3D file. A Hyper3D (H3D) file is a
compact file containing model data, results data, or both, depending on the method used to
create the file. The H3D file format is Altair proprietary. All H3D files, regardless of the method
used to create them, can be loaded into HyperView.
To create a H3D file from HvTrans, the result file must first be loaded into HvTrans. This is
done through the File menu. All file types that are supported in HyperView are supported in
HvTrans. Once the file has been loaded, the loadcases, simulation steps, and results that are
desired in the H3D file are selected within the GUI. These options are all contained on the left
side of the GUI. On the right size, compression information, model file information, and
component information is selected. These options allow you to customize the H3D file to
contain only the information you wish to save. Finally, Translate is selected to create the H3D
file.
HvTrans can also be run through a batch mode. For additional information on how to set this
up, please refer to the Online Help.

414 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

3.3 – HgTrans
HgTrans translates solver results files from their native file format to Altair Binary Format (ABF).

It runs in two modes:


• GUI Mode
• Batch Mode

To open the HvTrans GUI:


 On Windows:
From the Start menu > Programs > Altair HyperWorks 13.0 > Tools > HgTrans

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 415


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Exercise 7a - Result Presentation and HyperView Player


This exercise uses the session file, Exercise_7a.mvw.

Step 1: Load the file Exercise_7a.mvw and export images and videos of the
graphics area.
1. Open HyperWorks Desktop and select File > Open > Session to open a session file.
2. Select the file …\Model-files\7a-report\Exercise_7a.mvw.

3. Animate the session by selecting, .


Animating the session populates the plot windows with the plot of the measure group.

4. Turn on the display of the Image Capture toolbar by selecting


View > Browsers > HyperWorks > Image Capture.

5. Click Capture Graphics Area to save an image file of the graphics area.
6. Browse to a location to save the file and enter graphics-area as the file name.
7. From the Save as type, select JPEG (*,jpg, *.jpeg).
8. Click Save to save the file.
Open the file using any image viewer on your computer.

416 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

9. Click Capture Graphics Area Video to save the graphics area to a video file.
10. Browse to a location to save the file and enter graphics-area-video as the file name.
11. Click Save to save the file.
This saves an AVI file. Open the file using a program such as Windows Media Player to
view the video.

12. Click Capture Dynamic Rectangular Video to save the graphics area to a video file.
13. Browse to a location to save the file and enter dynamic-rect-video as the file name.
14. Click Save to save the file.
15. Use the left mouse button to draw a rectangle in the graphics area.
16. Use the right mouse button to accept the selection.
17. Open the AVI file.
Notice how only the area of the graphics area selected with the rectangle is shown.

Step 2: Set the Publish Settings and Publish the Session to HTML.
1. To set the defaults for JPEG files, select Preferences > Export Settings > JPG.

2. Set the JPEG quality to 99 and then click OK.


3. To set the defaults for H3D files, select Preferences > Export Settings > H3D.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 417


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

4. Make sure the options for Results and Animation are selected and then click OK.
5. Turn on the display of the Session Browser by selecting View > Browsers > HyperWorks
> Session.

6. Right click on the first HyperView in the Session Browser and select Publish Settings.
The first HyperView listed represents Window 1 on Page 1.
7. For Description enter Displacement and for Format select H3D. Then click OK.

This sets the description to be used for Window 1 on Page 1 as well as the type of file to
create.
Notice how for the animation window, there are format options for both animation files (H3D
and AVI) and image files (JPEG, TIF, PNG, BMP, GIF).

418 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

8. Right click on the first HyperGraph2D in the Session Browser and select Publish
Settings.
9. For Description enter Node 2656 and for Format select JPEG. Then click OK.

Notice that how for the plotting window formats, there are only image file formats available.
10. For the remaining windows, set the following Window descriptions and Format:

Window Window Description Format


HyperView Page 1 Window 3 Rot. Velocity AVI
HyperGraph2D Page 1 Window 4 Node 2656 PNG
HyperGraph2D Page 2 Window 1 Global Stress PNG
11. Within the Session Browser, verify that there is a check box under Publish for Page 1 and
Page 2:
12. Publish the session by selecting File > Publish > HTML.
13. Browse to a location to Save the file and save the file as Exercise_7a.html.

Step 3: Open the file Exercise_7a.html.


1. Locate the Exercise_7a.html file. Use an internet browser (such as Internet Explorer) to
open the file.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 419


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Note: Use the following procedure if your H3D (HyperView Player) window in HTML is
not working properly.
To Register and Invoke a HyperView Player Plugin on 64-bit platforms:
In order to avoid confusion with various bit versions of software on 64-bit platforms, a
32-bit HyperView Player (HVP) plugin is always packaged with the 64-bit HyperView
Player builds, therefore some additional steps must be taken to ensure the proper
registration of HVP Plugin:

Windows Platform
a) Register the HVP Plugin as administrator:
-Navigate to Start > All Programs > Altair HyperWorks 13.0 > Tools.
-Right click on Register HVP Control and click Run As Administrator to register
the HVP Control.
b) Invoke 32-bit Internet Explorer when invoking html pages with embedded HVP
plugins.

Unix Platform
a) Set environment variable ALTAIR_HOME to point to the HyperWorks installation.
b) Set environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH to point to /usr/lib , or /usr/lib32 to
enable Firefox to retrieve the 32-bit libraries on Unix based platforms.
c) Append environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH with
$ALTAIR_HOME/hw/bin/linux<bit_version> to enable Firefox to retrieve the libjpeg6b.so
library.

2. Notice in the left column there is a listing of the pages available in the session. Clicking on
either link will jump to the selected page.
3. Also notice on each page, under each window, there is the description that was entered into
the Session Browser in the previous step.
4. Click on Page 1 and then click in the window with the description Displacement. This
opens HyperView Player which allows you to view and animate the results.

420 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

5. Now click on the window with the description Rot. Velocity. This opens the AVI file in a
player which allows you to animate the results.

Step 4: Set Export Settings and Publish the Session to PowerPoint.


1. Select PowerPoint export settings by selecting Preferences > Export Settings > PPT
Options. Leave default options and click OK.
2. From the Session browser > Publish column, select the pages from your session that you
want to export.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 421


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

3. Right click on the first HyperView in the Session Browser and select Publish Settings.
The first HyperView listed represents Window 1 on Page 1.
4. For Description enter Displacement and for Format select JPG. Then click OK.

5. From the Standard toolbar, select the PPT icon or select File > Publish >
PowerPoint. The Publishing PowerPoint dialog is displayed.
6. From the dialog, select New PPT to publish to a new PowerPoint presentation. A
PowerPoint presentation is created from your HyperWorks Desktop session.

7. Select Publish, this will create and open a PowerPoint file “Presentation1”. Save it as 7a-
report.ppt in your 7a-report folder.
8. In your PowerPoint session, select Slide Show and review your report. Select End Show
and leave the PowerPoint session opened.

422 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

9. Go back to HyperWorks Desktop, make window 1 active and rotate the model to change its
view.

10. Select File > Publish > PowerPoint.


11. From the Publishing PowerPoint dialog, drop-down menu, select the Opened PPT that
you want to publish to. Or, choose Select PPT on Disk to open an existing PowerPoint file.
12. Click Synchronize when Publishing to add new pages to PowerPoint and also
synchronizes images, animations, and headers in the previously created PowerPoint pages.
Note: If you make changes to your HyperWorks Desktop session, you can transfer those
edits to an open or existing PowerPoint presentation.

13. Click Synchronize to update existing PowerPoint slides with the images and KPI's that have
been changed in your session.

Note: If you click Publish, all selected pages and windows will always be added as new
slides to your PowerPoint presentation.
14. Have a look at your PowerPoint session to review changes made in window1.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 423


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Step 5: Export a h3d file with Results.


1. Return to HyperView Desktop.
2. Select Preferences > Export Settings > H3D to change the settings for the exported H3D
file.
3. Uncheck the box next to Results and click OK. Now when a H3D file is exported, the
contour results will not be contained in the file.
4. Make Window 1 the active window, and select File > Export > Model to export the model in
Window 1 as a H3D file.
5. Browse to an appropriate location and save the file as export_h3d_results.h3d.

424 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

6. Open HyperView Player by selecting Start > All Programs > Altair HyperWorks 13.0 >
HyperView Player.

Select and open the file export_h3d_results.h3d.


Notice that this file does not have the displacement contoured but the measure group is
displayed as it was in the HyperView session.

7. To turn on/off the measure group, use the visualization tool .


Use the visualization tool to turn on and off the Measures.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 425


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Exercise 7b - Using HvTrans


This exercise uses the result file Postprocessing_demo.odb.

Step 1: Load the file Postprocessing_demo.odb into HvTrans


1. Open HvTrans by selecting Start > All Programs > Altair HyperWorks 13.0 > Tools >
HvTrans and select File > Open Result File… to open a results file.
2. Select the file …\Model-files\7b-hvtrans\Postprocessing_demo.odb.

Step 2: Set results to be exported for Step-1 and Step-4.


1. Under Current subcase, make sure that Step-1 has been selected.
2. For Simulation, verify that Increment 0 and Increment 1 are selected.

426 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

3. For Result Types, Displacements (v) are already selected by default. Also select S-
Global Stress Components (t) and S-Global Stress Components IP (t).
4. Change the Current subcase to Step-2 and notice how only Displacement (v) and UR-
Rotational displacement are the only Result Types available. The same is true with Step-
3. Verify that both Displacement and UR-Rotational displacement are selected.
5. Change the Current subcase to Step-4.
6. For Result Types, select Displacement (v) (c) and V-Spatial velocity (v) (c).

Step 3: Set the compression and model file and then translate the files to a H3D
file.
1. Under Options (on the right side of the GUI) check the box for Compress.
This activates the Maximum % loss field.
2. Enter 1 in the Maximum % loss field.
3. Check the box for Include model with translated results.
4. From the drop down, select From input deck.
5. Click on Browse… and select the file Postprocessing_demo.inp.

6. Click Translate… to create the H3D file.


HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 427
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

7. This opens a window for you to enter the filename and browse to a location to save the file.
Enter Postprocessing_demo.h3d as the filename.
8. Browse to the desired location and then select Save.

Step 4: Open the H3D file in HyperView and review the file.
1. Open HyperWorks Desktop and select a HyperView window.

2. Select File > Open > Model to open the Load Model Panel.
3. Select the Postprocessing_demo.h3d file as the model file and result file and click Apply.
4. Review Results browser > Step-1.
5. Go to the Contour panel. Notice that for Step-1, only Displacements and S-Global
Stresses are available.
6. Review Results browser, change to subcase Step-4. Notice that only Displacement and
V-Spatial Velocity are available.
7. Go to where you saved the h3d. Notice the file size is 529 KB.
8. Go to where the odb and inp files are saved. The odb file is 10.8 Mb. The file size is
drastically reduced by only selecting the desired results.

428 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Exercise 7c - Creating and Parameterizing Report Templates


This exercise uses the result files abstat and glstat.

Step 1: Load the file abstat into HyperGraph 2D and create airbag statistics
plots.
1. Open HyperWorks Desktop and set the window to the HyperGraph 2D application.

2. Go to the Build Plots panel .


3. For the Data file, select the file abstat in the folder
…\Model-files\7c-report-template\airbag\run1\abstat
4. For Y Type select Airbag Statistics, for Y Request select Airbag 1, and for Y Component
select Volume, Pressure, Internal Energy, and dm/dt in.

5. Set the Layout to One plot per Component and select a 4 window layout, .

6. Click Apply to create the plots.

Step 2: Load the file glstat into HyperGraph 2D and create energy plots.
1. You should still be in the Build Plots panel.
2. For the Data file, select the file glstat in the folder
…\Model-files\7c-report-template\airbag\run1\glstat

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 429


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

3. For Y Type select Energy, for Y Request select Kinetic Energy and Internal Energy, and
for Y Component select Energy.

4. Set the Layout to One plot per Request and select a 2 window layout, .

5. Click Apply to create a second page of plots.

Step 3: Create report template parameters for the line color, line style and curve
name.
1. Open the Parameters Browser by selecting View > Browsers > HyperWorks >
Parameters.
2. Expand the p1: Airbag Statistics-1 and p2: Energy-1 folders.
Notice how each window is represented in the Parameters Browser.

430 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

3. Expand w1: XY Plot, w2: XY Plot, w3: XY Plot and w4: XY Plot folders and then expand
the Curves folder within each of these folders.
4. Within the Curves folder each curve is listed. Using the Ctrl button, select c1:Airbag1 for
windows 1, 2, 3 and 4 as shown below:

5. Now the parameters for the report template for these curves can be selected. From the
listing of the parameters, select LineColor, LineStyle, and Name:

By using the Ctrl button and selecting the curves in the Parameters Browser, the 3
parameters selected above are all applicable to the 4 curves.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 431


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

6. Next the same parameters are defined for the second page. Using the Parameters
Browser, select c1: Energy for window 1 and window 2 on page 2. Then select the
parameters LineColor, LineStyle and Name.

Notice how this adds another parameter name to the parameter list. In the next step, we will
merge the similar parameters so there is only a single parameter for line style, line color,
and curve name.
7. Under the Name listing, left click on Xycurve Linecolor and while holding the Ctrl button,
left click on Xycurve Linecolor1.
8. Right click and select Merge. This combines the two parameters into a single parameter.

9. Repeat substeps 7-8 for the LineStyle and Name parameters. There should now only be 3
parameters.
432 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0
Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Step 4: Set the parameter defaults and save the report template.
1. Within the parameters list, you can double click on the Xycurve Name1 of the parameter
and rename the parameter.
2. Based on the names shown below, double click on each parameter and rename to the name
shown below:

3. The Default color and line style can also be changed. Click on the color and select a
different color from the color palette or select a new line style from the available listing.
4. Next {y.HWRequest} - {y.HWComponent}, click on … to launch a new window to set the
default for the curve name.
5. Leave the Value type set to value and change the Default value to Run1.

6. Click OK.

7. Save the report template by selecting File > Save As > Report Template.
8. Enter Exercise_7c.tpl as the filename and Save the file to an appropriate location.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 433


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

Step 5: Clear the session and load the report template.


1. From the menu bar select File > New > Session and then select Yes to clear the session.
2. Open the Reports panel using the Reports toolbar.
Select View > Toolbars > HyperWorks > Report to open the Reports toolbar.

3. Open the Reports panel by selecting Open Reports Panel, or File > Open> Report
Template.
4. The Flexible Report Templates dialog box will open. Click Delete to remove any templates
that are in the panel.
5. Click Add and browse to the file Exercise_7c.tpl and click Open.

The panel is populated with the parameters in the report template.


6. Change the Linecolor1 to a different color and the Linestyle1 type from the menu.

434 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

7. For Name, leave the default of Run 1; leave the other parameters with the defaults values.
8. Click Apply.

9. Returning to the Flexible Report Templates dialog box, update PLOT_FILE_1 to the
abstat file in
…\Model-files\7c-report-template\airbag\run2\abstat
10. Right click on the file path next to PLOT_FILE_1 and select Autofill directory.

This automatically updates the directories for the other files to the directory selected for
PLOT_FILE_1. Notice how PLOT_FILE_2 now points to the glstat file in the run2
directory.

11. Change the Linecolor1 to a different color, the Linestyle1 type from the menu and Name1
to Run 2.

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 435


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

12. For Mode select Overlay.

13. Click Apply.

Now every curve that is part of the same run is represented by the same color. Also, the
curves are appropriately named so that you know whether they come from Run 1 or Run 2.
Move to Page 2 and notice how the curve are appropriately named and colored.

436 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

HyperWorks 12.0 HyperView Introduction 437


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 7: Publishing Results and Advanced Topics

438 HyperView Introduction HyperWorks 12.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

Chapter 8

Improve Designs with HyperStudy:


Explore, Study, Optimize
1- HyperStudy Introduction
Altair HyperStudy is multi-disciplinary design study software that enables exploration and
optimization of design performance and robustness.
The design of the tool as a wizard makes it very easy to learn and use. It is applicable to
study the different aspects of a design under various conditions, including non-linear behaviors
and multi-disciplinary applications.
The models can be parameterized very easily. Besides the typical definition of solver
input data as design variables, the shape of a finite element model can also be parameterized
with ease.
HyperStudy Post-Processing module contains display, analysis and data mining
capabilities that helps engineers to overcome the challenging task of extracting relevant
information from multi-run studies. With its unique and powerful suite of tools, simulation results
can be analyzed, sorted and studied effectively in HyperStudy.
Specifically developed for design of experiments (DOE), fit (metamodelling), optimization
and stochastic studies, HyperStudy users can:
o Gain insight into the physics of a design
o Assess the robustness of a design for controlled or uncontrolled variations in the
design parameters
o Optimize a design for multi-disciplinary attributes

HyperWorks 13 HWD Intro 439


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

2- HyperStudy Benefits
1. Provides engineers with an easy way to study effects of design changes for complex
analysis events;
2. Allows engineers to assess the robustness of designs and provides the guidance necessary
to achieve robust designs;
3. Allows engineers to perform multi-disciplinary optimization studies for different attributes of a
design;
4. Allows engineers to perform system identification and correlation studies of designs;
5. Allows engineers to perform validation and evaluation of models and results using the
Evaluation and Rating module;
6. Complements existing CAE software with added functionality and direct interfaces to major
solvers;
7. Minimizes time-to-market by identifying design direction for difficult problems
8. Reads CAE native data files: RADIOSS, MotionSolve, OptiStruct, LS-DYNA, NHTSA ABF,
MADYMO, PAMCRASH, NASTRAN, ABAQUS, ADAMS, DADS, SIMPACK and others.

HyperStudy Interface

440 HWD Intro HyperWorks 13


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

HyperStudy Process
HyperStudy process is composed of two major steps: Study Setup and Study
Approaches. In Study setup, the analysis process is automated and in study approaches, this
process is repeated many times depending on the study objectives.

HyperStudy Overview

HyperWorks 13 HWD Intro 441


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

Study Setup
Study setup compromises of: parameterization, model definition and evaluation,
response extraction.
HyperStudy has two ways of design parameterization. First one, parametrizing an input
deck, is generic but can be involved at times. Second one, working on the HyperMesh model, is
more specific but very easy to use. Any ASCII input deck can be parametrized using
HyperStudy’s editor. In the case of FEA models, direct linking to Hypermesh provides
HyperStudy direct access to simulation models and to the features such as thickness,
concentrated masses, shape changes which are used as the design variables in DOE,
optimization or stochastic studies. HyperMorph is integrated for shape parameterization.

For response extraction, HyperStudy uses HyperGraph readers and hence any result that
can be read by HyperGraph can also be read by HyperStudy. HyperStudy can also extract any
value from an ASCII output file.

442 HWD Intro HyperWorks 13


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

Study Approaches
There are four study approaches in HyperStudy. They are: Design of Experiments
(DOE), fit, optimization and stochastics.
The objective of a DOE, or Design of Experiments, study is to understand how changes
to the parameters of a model influence its performance. In such a study, a model is repeatedly
run through a simulation for various combinations of parameter settings. Effects and
interactions of the design variables of the model can be studied.
From a DOE, mathematical models can be built describing the responses of the model
as an algebraic or numeric function of its parameters. This function is an approximation of the
true response. The algebraic or numeric expression that describes the response of a model as
a function of the parameters is known as a response surface. Once a set of response surfaces
have been generated for a model, those response surfaces can act as a proxy for the model.
New combinations of design variable settings not used in the original design can be plugged
into the response surface equations to quickly estimate the response of the model without
actually running the model through an entire analysis.
Optimization studies are used to find the parameter setting of a model that minimizes or
maximizes a particular objective function subject to a number of design constraints. A special
form of optimization problem, called System Identification, can also be solved in an optimization
study. In this case, the objective function is to minimize the quadratic deviation of a given
function from a target function. Optimization can be applied simultaneously to any one or more
analysis codes and hence can be multi-disciplinary. Size and shape optimizations can be
performed. The optimization can be performed using the analysis solver directly, or using a
response surface created in a DOE study.
Stochastic studies are used to study the influence of statistical distribution in the design
variables on the responses of a design. The stochastic analysis can be performed using the
analysis solver directly, or using a response surface created in a DOE study.

HyperWorks 13 HWD Intro 443


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

HS - Tutorial: Working with a Parameterized File

In this tutorial you will learn how to setup a study defined using a Parameterized File model, to
see how design variables (Thickness) affect the responses.
This tutorial starts HyperStudy directly (standalone).
HyperStudy performs DOE (Design of Experiments), optimization, and stochastic studies in a
CAE environment.
The design of HyperStudy as a wizard makes it very easy to learn and use.
It is applicable to study the different aspects of a design under various conditions, including non-
linear behaviors.
It can be applied in the multi-disciplinary optimization of a design combining different analysis
types.
Besides the typical definition of solver input data as design variables, the shape of a finite
element model can also be parameterized.
The following tutorial presents a way of setting up a study.

There are no files associated with this tutorial.

Step 1: Open HyperStudy and Setup a Study

1. Launch the HyperStudy application.


2. Go to the Welcome page, it is the first section of the HyperStudy GUI that you will see
when the application opens.
3. You can access the Quick Start options from the Welcome page.
This open example studies that have already been setup for you from this section. In the
example studies, the design variables, model and responses have already been defined
in order to help you become familiar with the study setup steps and adding approaches
that you can quickly test.

444 HWD Intro HyperWorks 13


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

4. Select Example_Beam to start this study. Select Next twice to proceed to the Define
models step.

HyperWorks 13 HWD Intro 445


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

5. Click Next to review the Design Variables.

446 HWD Intro HyperWorks 13


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

6. Click Next to proceed to the Specifications, keep default setting and click on Apply to
start this study.

7. Click Next to proceed to the Evaluate, keep default setting and click on Evaluate Tasks
to run the study.

HyperWorks 13 HWD Intro 447


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

8. Click Next to proceed to the Define responses, review responses and keep default
setting. Click on Evaluate expressions.

448 HWD Intro HyperWorks 13


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

9. Click Next to proceed to the Post processing, analyze results.

10. Click Next to proceed to the Report, select Create Report to create report.

HyperWorks 13 HWD Intro 449


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Chapter 8: HSTUDY INTRO

11. Click Next and Add approach… to add an approach selecting one of the Type.

Depending on your design objective you can add any combination of study approaches.

See Also:
HyperStudy Tutorials

450 HWD Intro HyperWorks 13


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Appendix A: HyperWorks Desktop Customization

Appendix A

HyperWorks
Desktop Customization

DEMO A1 – Basic Commands and Working with Handles

Description
In this demo, we will get the appropriate handles to set the page title for page 1. In
addition, the strength of the OpenStack and CloseStack commands as well as the
ListMethods command will be shown.

Handles used
session, project, page, title

TCL/TK commands used


GetSessionHandle, GetProjectHandle, GetPageHandle, SetTitle, ReleaseHandle,
ListMethods, OpenStack, CloseStack.

In this demo, we will get the appropriate handles to set the page title for page 1.

In addition, the strength of the OpenStack and CloseStack commands as well as the
ListMethods command will be shown.

Step 1: Launch HyperMesh Desktop > HyperView and open the Command
Window
1. From the Start Menu, select All Programs > Altair HyperWorks 13.0 >
HyperMesh Desktop

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 451


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Appendix A: HyperWorks Desktop Customization

This launches HyperWorks Desktop, select the Animation client, HyperView.


2. Click on the View pulldown menu and select Command Window.
This launches the Command Window where Tcl commands can be entered.

Step 2: Enter the appropriate command to get the session handle.


1. In the first line of the Command Window, enter the following line and then press
Enter:
hwi GetSessionHandle my_session

This gets the session handle my_session. my_session is also returned as the
output of the GetSessionHandle command as this command was successful.
2. Remember that handle names are unique within a given session.
3. Enter the following line again into the command window to view the error message
which occurs
hwi GetSessionHandle my_session

452 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Appendix A: HyperWorks Desktop Customization

Step 3: Enter the appropriate commands to get the project and page handle
for page 1.
1. For the next line, enter the following:
my_session GetProjectHandle proj_1

2. Next, using the proj handle proj_1, we can get the page handle for page 1:
proj_1 GetPageHandle page1 1

Notice how the GetPageHandle command needs the page number in addition to
the handle name.

Step 4: Set the page title using the SetTitle command on the page handle.
1. Now that we have the page handle, the SetTitle command can be used to set the
page title for page 1. Enter the following in the Command Window:
page1 SetTitle Pg1_Animation

2. After hitting Enter, go into the Session Browser, you will see that the page title has
been updated to Pg1_Animation:

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 453


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Appendix A: HyperWorks Desktop Customization

Step 5: Release each of the handles as they are no longer needed


1. To release the page handle, use the ReleaseHandle command. Type the
following into the Command Window:
page1 ReleaseHandle
2. The same process is done to release the project handle and the session handle.
Type the following two lines into the Command Window to release these handles:
proj_1 ReleaseHandle
my_session ReleaseHandle

Notice how for each of the handles, the ReleaseHandle command needs to be
used.
While this isn’t too cumbersome when there are only three handles, when there are
more handles, this very cumbersome. In Step 6 the OpenStack and CloseStack
commands are used to eliminate the need to release the handles individually.

Step 6: Set the page title for page 1 using the OpenStack and CloseStack
commands.
1. Before getting any handles, use the OpenStack command to keep track of the
handles. Enter the following command into the Command Window:
hwi OpenStack

454 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc
Appendix A: HyperWorks Desktop Customization

2. The same process is used to get the appropriate handles and set the page title.
Enter the following commands in to the Command Window:
hwi GetSessionHandle my_session
my_session GetProjectHandle proj_1
proj_1 GetPageHandle page1 1
page1 SetTitle Pg1_Animation_updated

3. Next, let’s use the ListMethods command on the page handle to see what other
commands are available:
page1 ListMethods
This returns the following list of commands as well as the necessary input for each
command:

4. Notice that there is a GetTitle command. This command will return the page title
for the given page handle:
page1 GetTitle

HyperWorks 13.0 HWD Introduction 455


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc.
Appendix A: HyperWorks Desktop Customization

5. Finally, use the CloseStack command to release all the handles which exist
between the OpenStack command and this point.
hwi CloseStack

Using the OpenStack and CloseStack commands is a much more efficient way to
manage handles.
6. Right click in the command window to open the Context Menu and save this
procedure as tcl file.
File > Save… > All

Save the tcl file as A1.tcl.

Note: Please refer to the Demo Model Files folder and Online Help to get more
details.

456 HWD Introduction HyperWorks 13.0


Proprietary Information of Altair Engineering, Inc